<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>TVU MLink Archives - TVU Networks</title>
	<atom:link href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip-category/tvu-mlink/feed/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link></link>
	<description>The lowest prices for your full LLC publishing compliance!</description>
	<lastBuildDate>Wed, 11 Mar 2026 14:06:09 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<language>en-US</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>
	hourly	</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>
	1	</sy:updateFrequency>
	<generator>https://wordpress.org/?v=6.7.2</generator>
	<item>
		<title>TVU MLink TE5500 v7.4 and TE5800 v8.0 User Guide</title>
		<link>https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-v7-4-and-te5800-v8-0-user-guide/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Cynthia]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 11 Mar 2026 14:06:02 +0000</pubDate>
				<guid isPermaLink="false">https://editwww.tvunetworks.com/?post_type=tips&#038;p=167981</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models.</p>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-v7-4-and-te5800-v8-0-user-guide/">TVU MLink TE5500 v7.4 and TE5800 v8.0 User Guide</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[
<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-227fc3b4-c9e5-4ed2-af1e-45f928f47159"><img fetchpriority="high" decoding="async" width="1033" height="584" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-v8.jpg" alt="Featured image MLink TE5500 and TE5800 v7 v8" class="wp-image-167992" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-v8.jpg 1033w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-v8-300x170.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-v8-1024x579.jpg 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-v8-768x434.jpg 768w" sizes="(max-width: 1033px) 100vw, 1033px" /></figure>



<p id="block-6d1b45f9-aac7-47ac-9913-c1122b83b354">TVU MLink is the complete and versatile rack-mount IP video solution designed specifically for use in vans, trucks, sport utility vehicles, and fixed studios. MLink uses all cellular 3G/4G/LTE/5G, satellite, microwave, WiFi, and Ethernet connections to transmit a high-quality, reliable HD video stream with sub-second latency. A stream can be started with any type of connection, and additional or removed connections can be made at any time, without disrupting video.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Introduction, setup, and base operation</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-045c245e-a8b9-47cd-85e6-565850402244"><strong>Introduction, setup, and base operation</strong></h2>



<p id="block-16f0602a-c8d1-4ffb-b4f3-592f4336d896">The TVU MLink features Inverse StatMux Plus (ISX) technology for dependable video broadcast in even the most challenging transmission environments, such as a moving vehicle. TVU MLink uses IP67-rated external roof-mounted antennas to ensure the best possible signal strength.</p>



<p id="block-1818b527-f7ec-433f-954e-e688575aa0d3">The TVU MLink transmitter also features the new TVU 7 platform, which supports the TVU Partyline feature.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-19ab3f8a-f475-403d-bb36-fe3e147acb86"><strong>TVU MLink overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-1d024a38-2317-4f13-981f-c914e2d0232d">TVU MLink models TE5500 and TE5800 are a part of the TVU ecosystem. The video streams from MLink can also be easily distributed to multiple locations using TVU Grid® for live video switching, routing, and distribution solutions.</p>



<p id="block-a8926293-24ad-4e92-81ed-2623feab10a7">The TVU MLink TE5500 transmitter (encoder) uses the TVU Command Center Web interface, which provides a cloud-based centralized management and control solution for all TVU devices and services. For detailed information about TVU Command Center, refer to the “TVU Command Center Setup and User Guide.“</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image" id="block-aff6a404-0af6-4b61-ace9-c2e53397bfb6"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/command-center-3-1024x623.png" alt="This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is command-center-3-1024x623.png"/></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	</div>

<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Features overview</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-31f0298a-b322-417a-8a56-dba858e31ffe"><strong>Features overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-aeb3a23a-94e3-47e1-ab09-72fe08a7e603"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5500 contribution encoder:</strong></p>



<ul id="block-3765adad-080e-4240-a0b3-7f8776b84e47" class="wp-block-list">
<li>MLink TE5500 is an ISX transmitter in a 1RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats 4K 25/30P, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Ultra-low latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 SDI-embedded audio channels or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Single Ethernet port for commodity internet connectivity.</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Status monitor output via DP or HDMI.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8 Mbps CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (Package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Supports HTTP, UDP, RTMP, and RTMPS protocols.</li>



<li>Directly compatible with TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU Channel, and TVU CloudR.</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-8ff9b288-013e-49bc-b60f-81fed6d3dcea"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5800 &#8211; ISX field / Remote uplink:</strong></p>



<ul id="block-d21ce1f3-eb64-4c42-a77a-3effbed917cc" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The MLink TE5800 is an ISX transmitter in a 2RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Aggregates any mix of cellular, Ethernet, WiFi, satellite, and microwave.</li>



<li>Supports up to 6 embedded LTE or 5G modems. Ships standard with external IP67 rated external LTE antennas (3m cables) or optional 5G antennas.</li>



<li>Has the ability to support a mix of 5G (optional) /LTE/4G and 3G modems (internal to the chassis) with external SMA antenna connections (4x SMA per 5G Modem, 2x SMA per LTE modem). The MLink TE5800 allows modem antennas to connect directly to the chassis, simplifying cabling.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats, including 4K (50/59.94P), 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Super low-latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 channels of SDI-embedded audio or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8Mb/s CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>File upload management; Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Easily accessible front panel SIM card slots for easy configuration.</li>



<li>Front panel LCD interface for easy configuration, control, and monitoring.</li>



<li>Embedded outbound WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for use with ISX transmissions.</li>



<li>Embedded HotSpot WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for access point use (Internet connectivity).</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Optional TVU Router support (TVU model RE980 only) which turns MLink into a high-speed access point in virtually any location. All data connections are aggregated together to provide high-speed connectivity.</li>



<li>Optional dual power supply</li>



<li>Directly compatible with the TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU CloudR, and TVU Channel.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-3db1face-0b93-48b2-8a2d-2139a32db887"><img decoding="async" width="476" height="452" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png" alt="ENG vehicle configuration example" class="wp-image-95581" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png 476w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example-300x285.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 476px) 100vw, 476px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	About this guide</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-9aac6628-8ccf-4df0-9bfc-aac5cf04dbd8"><strong>About this guide</strong></h2>



<p id="block-73b73475-1841-4baf-8ddc-f00857636c36">This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models, the TVU MLink Model TE5500 (for Ethernet applications) and the TVU MLink Model TE5800 transmitters.</p>



<p id="block-f0e5aada-3c50-4b35-8b60-1d103cd6a5d4">Main topics:</p>



<ul id="block-2855e063-7cae-4fe0-bf76-5de665484dd5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Setting up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5800</li>



<li>Using the faceplate controls and operations panel</li>



<li>Configuring, monitoring, and controlling the TVU MLink transmitter using the Web UI</li>



<li>Operating the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5800</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-cf23d1a6-8a14-435a-9bd0-30da9c802077"><strong>Model TE5500 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-41fae7e2-bc62-474c-9658-b3072d805fd6">The TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> USB ports on the front panel are intended to support only a keyboard and mouse. Do not connect USB modems, network adapters, and like devices into these ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-51eb4480-fbcc-4c9f-89cc-1d1587027e09"><img decoding="async" width="528" height="141" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel" class="wp-image-95735" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png 528w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel-300x80.png 300w" sizes="(max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e1055d03-65f7-4aaa-ae14-59956fb1a7ca"><strong>Model TE5500 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-9b344a6b-c28b-4df5-864e-55fa037b397f">The TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel features the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The USB ports support up to four USB devices from any of the six ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7e07b14f-18c3-4f7a-95fc-50a68ddf29de"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="531" height="180" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel connections" class="wp-image-95742" style="aspect-ratio:2.95;width:688px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png 531w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 531px) 100vw, 531px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5800 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-63f82d77-36bf-4f9b-a0dc-fdd6a4ce7310"><strong>Model TE5800 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-4745b904-4279-4cb6-9de4-2bef02b0f53e">The TVU MLink model TE5800 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls. The TE5800 ships with 3 standard LTE dome antennas to support 6 modems.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7365d3c0-4b3d-4b8e-9faf-ed771c2a75d5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="512" height="177" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5700 front panel" class="wp-image-95749" style="aspect-ratio:2.8926553672316384;width:742px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png 512w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel-300x104.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 512px) 100vw, 512px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-774c131e-d5c6-490a-907b-a7c3288d4a23"><strong>Model TE5800 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f79b08c4-6237-445a-a0f7-31dd381384c2">The TVU MLink model TE5800 and rear panel feature the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The top left USB port supports WiFi while the bottom right port supports hotspot functionality (for TE5800 support only)</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4803474f-7176-4e4f-ba4a-b18300a14db3"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="705" height="279" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-back-panel-2.jpg" alt="TE5800 rear panel" class="wp-image-167985" style="aspect-ratio:2.6116504854368934;object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-back-panel-2.jpg 705w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-back-panel-2-300x119.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 705px) 100vw, 705px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Before you begin</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f9c911de-af64-4ba3-ad48-c5ee57b4062d"><strong>Before you begin</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f996f828-633d-4b49-84ff-15af08fec6d8">Complete the following procedures to set up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and TE5800 transmitters.<br>Refer to the front and rear panel overviews for MLink transmitter connection descriptions and locations to assist with the setup procedures. Contact TVU Support if you have any difficulties during the setup process.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-727d10fd-c597-429a-9b2d-cf96f2f7fec7"><strong>MLink TE5500 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-04866067-8ee5-4e57-8903-5fe200b8ecdb">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5500 transmitter. All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate:</p>



<ol id="block-a6688ead-48c6-4771-abc3-1c9d0adf4b0b" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect a computer display connector to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the top left rear panel USB port to enable WiFi if required.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the bottom right rear panel USB port to enable hotspot functionality if required.</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to the left Ethernet port on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="7" id="block-645bb35a-3fc3-4e3e-96ff-7d215516415f" class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5800 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-028c6532-4a3f-4468-83e8-969ed834d54b"><strong>MLink TE5800 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-b71b061e-c3b1-4030-ab61-89272a6bd692">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5800 transmitter:</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol id="block-2705eff2-62d4-4a5f-adf5-bbc0e0110913" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect the computer display to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>If required, connect WiFi MIMO antennas to the top left WiFi connectors to support the MIMO mode configuration for LTE downloading (does not support uploading.)</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to one of the two GbE Ethernet ports on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the antenna connector to the modem connection on the rear panel:</li>
</ol>



<ul id="block-ad52d0e1-b733-40cf-afb9-db43293aba90" class="wp-block-list">
<li>LTE dome antenna (3 antennas) with two connectors. One antenna supports 2 modems and should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>



<li>5G modem antenna (one per modem) with four connectors. The 5G antenna should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-9ef0e27e-29c2-4c84-aad7-1687ebf90691"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="484" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png" alt="WiFi MIMO antennas" class="wp-image-95497" style="aspect-ratio:1.5764462809917354;width:495px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png 763w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas-300x190.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5bb7d6fe-b593-4472-8f41-86ed39d1f4e5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="381" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png" alt="LTE dome antenna" class="wp-image-95623" style="aspect-ratio:1.6377952755905512;width:463px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna-300x183.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4c384503-c628-40e0-9063-6cfbd85734c6"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="656" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png" alt="5G modem antenna" class="wp-image-95511" style="aspect-ratio:1.5508274231678487;width:468px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png 656w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna-300x193.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 656px) 100vw, 656px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" id="block-b26aacbc-eaff-47ac-882d-1b034a503e07" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="7" id="block-40118d21-0ab8-4396-a416-5c64bdb459b9" class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	MLink TE5800 front panel controls and operations</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f34630c5-1e1f-42fc-9ce6-7396c3f93a12"><strong>MLink TE5800 front panel controls and operations</strong></h2>



<p id="block-af727db7-ccfb-4b6f-81cf-c6866731eab9">You will use the control panel buttons to access common device functions, such as switching receivers, changing transmission modes, or triggering a live transmission.</p>



<p id="block-1199da4c-2dee-4cf9-9b00-cd4daea6fff8">The control panel button functions are as follows:</p>



<ul id="block-a0131ccf-4a6b-4da5-ad5c-1b221342d614" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the<strong> Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to switch between paired receivers or transceivers.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>green check button</strong> to go live or to confirm an action.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>Red X button</strong> to stop a live transmission or deny an action.</li>



<li>Use the <strong>Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrows</strong> to switch between preset transmission modes.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-41795cdd-4ae6-4c5d-9d7d-b94369c82d92"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="539" height="155" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png" alt=" Control panel buttons" class="wp-image-95539" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png 539w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons-300x86.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 539px) 100vw, 539px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5800 On and Off</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b72ebb1f-1314-4225-8eee-4adb02564570"><strong>Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5800 On and Off</strong></h2>



<p id="block-09ebd495-d9d2-4342-a911-53ea44204272">Complete the following steps to power on/off and restart the MLink transmitter:</p>



<ol id="block-98812fa0-b63d-4fc5-b8d2-862811408755" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To power On the TVU MLink, press the power button in the front panel&#8217;s left lower section.<br><br>The name and PID number of the unit displays on the MLink LCD screen during boot-up.</li>



<li>To power Off the TVU MLink, press and hold the power button down for more than four seconds.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The TVU MLink will automatically restart if the power button is pressed and held in for less than four seconds.</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c401d83b-fce7-4474-bc0a-b47e77a7ad85"><strong>TVU MLink TE5800 front LCD panel and functions</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ca76c0ae-9d76-417c-ab7f-8312d8300364">The MLink front LCD display panel allows the user to view the status of the following functions:</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-2cdef7f4-368b-4e01-bd0d-aac59557f512"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="338" height="156" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink front LCD panel" class="wp-image-95707" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png 338w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel-300x138.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1624205c-0d2b-451d-96f7-b39188706975"><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong></h2>



<p id="block-811a979c-6beb-482d-a6ac-97055a3da2f9">The transmission status monitor displays the current transmission status of the paired TVU One, referred to as the “TVU Pack.”</p>



<ul id="block-2b31b680-e067-42a6-99eb-0fbfa0e55c51" class="wp-block-list">
<li>If the display is flashing “LIVE,” it indicates the transmission is live.</li>



<li>If a camera or input source is not connected to the TVU MLink transmitter, the LCD panel displays “Online.”</li>



<li>If a video source is detected, but the session is not Live, the display will show “STDBY” to indicate it is in Standby mode.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-053a5c96-2265-4e27-9c10-43758524dca9"><strong>Receiver name</strong></h2>



<p id="block-104919fe-bc7e-4232-b5a7-833bb117f8b1">The currently selected receiver name is displayed on line 2.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-bd8294f3-4b0c-4d15-8504-f15296240397"><strong>Preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ef2503ec-be68-4119-a30d-2ddcafb8d76b">The transmission mode status for the selected receiver is displayed under the receiver name.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b6129e97-a166-475d-adbe-ed6de373c630"><strong>Input</strong></h2>



<p id="block-a1011731-4825-4d79-a904-7f5b641fb98f">The input source is displayed on line 4.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a0a5a91e-a4fe-4e78-b02a-25e0afb46b96"><strong>Using the TVU MLink controls and operations panel</strong></h2>



<p id="block-88725c0d-e21c-421f-87f4-9953a87fecd0">Complete the following procedures in steps 2 through 4 to use the TVU MLink front panel controls and operations functions. The MLink status displays on the LCD screen.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the following “LCD status display panel” figure unless otherwise indicated for this section.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-b85be09c-78ff-4779-9c51-6bd755e5759b"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="212" height="108" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LCD-status-display-panel.png" alt="" class="wp-image-95616" style="aspect-ratio:1.962962962962963;width:448px;height:auto"/></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8182a10c-316f-4939-97d5-463498e00f0c">Figure reference: LCD status display panel</h5>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d9cc179-6deb-4aa2-99ad-8885682fcd6b"><strong>Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-05c58cea-a05b-4290-86b9-829a18648759" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Locate the currently selected transceiver’s name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 2 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel. Press the <strong>Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to scroll through and select the available receiver.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD panel.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-6a6ffade-d9af-4818-b6ab-478910b8dd97">The default preset transmission mode may be different for each receiver or transceiver. You may see the preset transmission mode change when switching between other receivers and transceivers.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-5db3dcbb-7269-4f88-8cac-07e130a498bc"><strong>Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-96c971f3-869e-4ad4-8f36-db40f3457a71" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Locate the preset transmission modes displayed under the receiver name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 3 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel<strong> Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrow keys</strong> to scroll through and select the desired option.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD display panel.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1ed36f76-e25b-4073-9196-0ebc031c4783"><strong>Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-fbd091e2-c4d6-40a1-8d1f-59796c36cf6d" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Before going “Live,” connect the camera or input source to the MLink transmitter. If a camera or input source is not connected, “Online” displays in the top left corner of the LCD panel.</li>



<li>Verify that the camera or input source is connected. The LCD panel displays “STDBY” in the top left corner of the LCD panel. Refer to callout<strong> ( 1 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To go “Live,” press the <strong>green check mark button</strong> on the front control panel. The transmitter will prompt you to start a live transmission in the LCD display.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e393ceb4-cb15-4de9-a5bd-a6bd85e744b5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="359" height="121" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png" alt="Go Live action display" class="wp-image-95602" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png 359w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display-300x101.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 359px) 100vw, 359px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" id="block-c081d575-7a67-499f-adfc-d96e45a39110" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To confirm, click the<strong> green check mark button</strong> once more.</li>



<li>To deny the request, click the front panel controls <strong>red X button</strong>. The selected preset transmission mode and paired receiver name will display on the LCD panel.</li>



<li>When the transmitter is in “Live” mode, the word “LIVE” (as shown in the go-live confirmation display) blinks in the top left corner of the LCD panel. The variable bitrate will also display in real-time next to the flashing “LIVE” indicator.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-d72687bf-4727-492d-9445-49a8d20bd714"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="372" height="131" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png" alt="Live confirmation display" class="wp-image-95609" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png 372w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation-300x106.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 372px) 100vw, 372px" /></figure>



<p id="block-62acf93f-df1a-4113-9d5a-bcdc5a6ab448">The selected preset transmission mode, paired receiver name, and input source are displayed.</p>



<ol start="7" id="block-21b72411-0130-4165-a9ca-31a06bb9b719" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the <strong>red X button</strong> on the control panel to stop a live transmission. The unit will prompt you to stop the live transmission, as shown in the following figure.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7c5c5a0f-6e0d-490d-baa2-eee6b8a61fde"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="366" height="125" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png" alt="Go live cancellation 2" class="wp-image-96642" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png 366w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 366px) 100vw, 366px" /></figure>



<ol start="8" id="block-e85217b5-2d41-4952-8250-23fd16f89da0" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To confirm that you want to stop the transmission, press the front panel&#8217;s controls&#8217; <strong>green check mark button</strong>. Then, click the <strong>red X button</strong> on the front panel controls to deny the request.</li>



<li>After the live transmission has stopped, the screen returns to (“STDBY”) mode.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 5 &#8211; Using the display or HDMI port</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ad48fefc-7c24-42c0-82c8-d00c0cceb21a"><strong>Step 5 &#8211; Use the Display or HDMI port to view the Video preview and transmission status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-fc580d6c-1b9f-4c55-ac24-14bca291ecf6">To view a detailed view of the status screen, complete the following steps to connect a monitor to the Display or HDMI port on the TVU MLink rear panel:</p>



<ol id="block-b1224f7e-3bf6-46bb-81fb-05ed88238219" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a Display or HDMI monitor cable to the appropriate port on the TVU MLink to view the detailed status display screen.</li>



<li>Connect a camera to the TVU MLink and power on both the camera and MLink devices. The Video Preview Transmission screen displays.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-53a2e8e3-a716-4b42-8422-902585af82be"><strong>Video Preview Transmission screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-e4f0afda-fd2f-499b-ac08-d75df99cc82d">Refer to the following “Video preview transmission screen” figure and the live TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized" id="block-3927a50f-ad5f-4aa1-9c46-abe85d33d77a"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="671" height="382" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/video-preview-transmission-screen.png" alt="video preview transmission screen" class="wp-image-167999" style="width:627px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/video-preview-transmission-screen.png 671w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/video-preview-transmission-screen-300x171.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 671px) 100vw, 671px" /></figure>



<p id="block-9e975f9c-6871-4231-a895-2bea81985d3e">TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions:</p>



<ul id="block-e9b13133-fea5-4d8d-9e49-5586cc6de8e5" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Input preview</strong> &#8211; Shows the live picture from the camera and captured in TVU MLink.</li>



<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the TVU Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator displays black/gray, the TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul id="block-63aad145-ac79-482e-a680-f05d8050f8a9" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Data card status monitor:</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-a8d714ba-2126-4f24-8362-0bd30e2c2aff">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the Pack will appear as green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The green status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The red status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The black status indicates there is no card.</p>



<ul id="block-22675e3b-085f-49f8-8941-9a13d776674e" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number. Be sure to have this information available when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor</strong> &#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>



<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e7053efb-6f3b-4504-b963-baa7ca244f54"><strong>Standby video input status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6aa5f754-5bcb-41d0-808f-e457670fcd95">Refer to the following “Standby video input status screen” and the TVU MLink standby video status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized" id="block-f268236b-72b5-43ee-bff1-2366de2179ce"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="702" height="403" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/standby-video-input-status-screen.png" alt="standby video input status screen" class="wp-image-168006" style="width:631px" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/standby-video-input-status-screen.png 702w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/standby-video-input-status-screen-300x172.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 702px) 100vw, 702px" /></figure>



<ul id="block-658e7387-cca0-48ba-92f3-d138b070aece" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Connection status:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-5fbbb05e-32a8-4686-9cc7-62424ff6e797">&#8211; Displays the status and IP of each network connection. The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul id="block-03e3c539-d79e-4cbc-98eb-039beee00497" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator is black/gray, TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul id="block-3cb1933f-5fe4-4279-a187-b722edd34dfd" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Data card status monitor:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-6162844d-0102-4641-837d-7d9938a0a9a8">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul id="block-6746a05e-f5c0-4f47-9ea3-bf8a098153da" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>



<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number and is used when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor </strong>&#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced Configuration</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1096bb2e-7122-4498-9515-5500907a2119"><strong>Advanced Configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-2a8633c8-f068-486e-b46c-b48bb42af067">This section provides instructions for advanced configuration settings for hotspot, WiFi, modem, microwave, router, and BGAN configuration for the MLink model TE5800 transmitter.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d80faff-c0c4-4f24-8e3f-fa1a77b89c60"><strong>TVU MLink system status monitoring and control using a Web browser on an iPhone or a smart mobile device</strong></h2>



<p id="block-23344aa8-5a67-4bde-a8e6-123ddc57adef">The TVU Transmitter&#8217;s operational status can be monitored, and various parts of the transmission can be controlled from a Web browser. This interface can be accessed using a standard web browser connected to the TVU MLink TE5800 hotspot USB port on the rear transmitter panel.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-768fedfb-caef-4e63-9e01-de29877b4e6f"><strong>Connecting the MLink TE5500 to the internal hotspot (optional)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-15a0120a-43b6-4ea0-a9b4-df8fd3304421">Complete the following steps to configure the TVU MLink transmitter to the internal hotspot using your iPhone or a smart mobile device:</p>



<ol id="block-d3b9bfba-fd18-481d-bad8-35b331cbb873" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the TP-Link WiFi dongle to the rear panel bottom right USB port.</li>



<li>Search for the Hotspot on your iPhone/smart device, then, when prompted, enter the case-sensitive SSID:
<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVUPACK_XXXX<br>(Where X is the last 4 digits of the MLink’s PID)</li>



<li>The default password is the last 8 digits of the MLink PID</li>



<li>All password characters are uppercase. The password can be changed in the Web UI if desired.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>



<ol start="3" id="block-386349a3-2223-4408-b12c-281b874a5074" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect to the SSID using your iPhone/smart device. Refer to the following “TVU MLink status; video and network screen” for examples of how the status screens display on a smart device Web browser.</li>



<li>Once the connection is established, open a web browser and enter the following IP address in the address line to see the transmitter&#8217;s &#8220;System status&#8221;: <strong>http://192.168.4.1</strong></li>



<li>The MLink System Status panel will display.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>MLink System status panel overview</strong></h2>



<p>The System status panel provides access to the following information.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5a0616c8-6f56-40e2-ab82-262664494ad8"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="261" height="344" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-system-status-panel.jpg" alt="TE5800 system status panel" class="wp-image-168013" style="aspect-ratio:0.8590604026845637;object-fit:contain;width:436px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-system-status-panel.jpg 261w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/TE5800-system-status-panel-228x300.jpg 228w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 261px) 100vw, 261px" /></figure>



<p id="block-626f8a6f-d636-4579-8b12-75bcb64cefd8">The MLink transmitter System status panel provides access to the following information:</p>



<p><strong>(A) MLink advanced operations icon</strong> &#8211; Tap the three-bar icon to open the advanced operations menu. This opens the Live, File,<br>General, and Advanced menu selection panels.. Refer to “MLink Advanced operations &#8211; Web interface controls” for more information.<br><strong>(B) Configuration shortcut icons</strong> &#8211; These icons open the WiFi, HotSpot, Modem, and Ethernet configuration panels.<br><strong>(C) System panel</strong> &#8211; Displays the MLink mode, version, PID, CPU capacity, and temperature.<br><strong>(D) Network panel</strong> &#8211; Modem card information including type, connectivity, and IP address all organized by slot number.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="576" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Network-panel.jpg" alt="Network panel" class="wp-image-168020" style="width:575px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Network-panel.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Network-panel-300x200.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Network-panel-768x513.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(E) IFB/VoIP panel</strong> &#8211; This panel allows the user to change the audio level of the IFB function.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="464" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/IFB-VoIP-panel.jpg" alt="IFB VoIP panel" class="wp-image-168027" style="width:585px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/IFB-VoIP-panel.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/IFB-VoIP-panel-300x161.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/IFB-VoIP-panel-768x413.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(F) Video panel</strong> &#8211; Displays video transmission information and status.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="859" height="574" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Video-panel.jpg" alt="Video panel" class="wp-image-168034" style="width:604px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Video-panel.jpg 859w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Video-panel-300x200.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Video-panel-768x513.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 859px) 100vw, 859px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(G) Power panel</strong> &#8211; Contains the reboot and power off buttons.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="531" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Power-panel.jpg" alt="Power panel" class="wp-image-168041" style="width:602px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Power-panel.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Power-panel-300x185.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Power-panel-768x473.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c5db7c4c-272f-4888-a06d-4e09368dde6c"><strong>Network configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The Network configuration panel allows users to monitor and control all aspects of MLink network connectivity.</p>



<p>To open the <strong>Network</strong> configuration panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>General</strong> drop-down menu and select <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="436" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-168048" style="width:590px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu.jpg 436w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>LAN Settings</strong> panel will display.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg" alt="General Network LAN settings" class="wp-image-168065" style="width:610px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-300x147.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-768x376.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>In the LAN settings panel, set the MLink&#8217;s local LAN address. The default IP address is <strong>192.168.4.1</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Subnet Mask</strong> and select a <strong>Router</strong> setting from the drop-down menu; the default is <strong>Auto</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>WiFi configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The WiFi panel provides configuration information and access to change the WiFi settings. The MLink TE5500 can optionally support multiple WiFi connections by purchasing optional hardware. For more information, contact TVU Networks support.</p>



<p>When multiple WiFi adapters are connected, you can scan available slots for WiFi adapters and configure the WiFi login information using the TVU MLink WiFi setup and configuration panel.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring WiFi</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your WiFi settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the<strong> WiFi </strong>icon, or click <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="167" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/WiFi-icon.jpg" alt="WiFI icon" class="wp-image-168072" style="width:419px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/WiFi-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/WiFi-icon-300x87.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>WiFi</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>WiFi</strong> slider.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="362" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel.jpg" alt="Ethernet icon WiFi panel" class="wp-image-158285" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel-300x189.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the <strong>Scan</strong> button to display any available networks. The center panel displays available networks. Choose the desired network from the <strong>Devices</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Click the “<strong>i</strong>” Information icon in the <strong>Devices</strong> list. The Security window opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="504" height="252" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi.png" alt="wifi" class="wp-image-158292" style="width:580px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi.png 504w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi-300x150.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 504px) 100vw, 504px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The Security setting supports WPA2/WPA-PSK.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Enter the <strong>Password</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Join</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Hotspot settings</strong></h2>



<p>The Hotspot panel provides status information about clients connected through the hotspot.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring hotspot</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your WiFi settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Hotspot</strong> icon, or click <strong>General </strong>&gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="171" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/HotSpot-icon.jpg" alt="Hotspot icon" class="wp-image-168079" style="width:469px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/HotSpot-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/HotSpot-icon-300x89.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Hotspot</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong><strong>Hotspot</strong></strong> slider.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="578" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel.jpg" alt="Hotspot panel" class="wp-image-168086" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel-300x300.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel-150x150.jpg 150w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel-50x50.jpg 50w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Hotspot-panel-108x108.jpg 108w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To update the <strong>Password</strong>, edit the <strong>Password field</strong>.<br><br>The new password must be 8 characters. A system restart is necessary after changing the password.<br></li>



<li>The hotspot feature will enable a connected device to access the internet using one of the connected networks.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Hotspot access allows FTP file transfers. If higher bandwidth is required, refer to “Router configuration settings.”</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Connected Clients</strong> panel displays a list of devices that are connected to hotspots.</li>



<li>To manually select the route taken (for example, a Hotel WiFi network), choose the path from the <strong>Connected Clients</strong> list. In the Bandwidth drop-down menu, choose 2.4G or 5G.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Modem configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The Modem panel provides modem configuration information. Many cellular data cards are automatically detected by the TVU MLink transmitter and will self-configure. If this is the case, no further action will be required. However, if a data card requires configuration, you can use the Modem panel to configure it.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> For information about the RPS Link and MLink v8 Model TE5800 antenna configuration, refer to “Antenna configuration RPS Link and MLink v8.0 model TE5800.”</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To open the Modems panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Modem</strong> icon, or click <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="165" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/modem-icon.jpg" alt="Modem icon" class="wp-image-168093" style="width:503px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/modem-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/modem-icon-300x86.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Modems</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Continue to Configuring data cards.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring data cards</strong></h2>



<p>There are two data card configuration methods, Auto and Manual.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Auto configuration</strong></h2>



<p>Data cards are “Auto” detected, and further configuration is not necessary.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="556" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-Auto.jpg" alt="General Network Modems Auto" class="wp-image-168100" style="width:663px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-Auto.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-Auto-300x248.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<p>To confirm that the data cards are auto-detected:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Both <strong>Roaming for all modems</strong> and <strong>Roaming for this modem </strong>box are checked by default.</li>



<li>The <strong>Auto</strong> Network registration radio mode button is selected.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Available Slots</strong> drop-down list to confirm the list of available slots.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Manual configuration</strong></h2>



<p>When using the Manual data card configuration method, you can scan the list of available carriers and select the ones you want to configure. You can also change the APN or other details as needed.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="665" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-manual.jpg" alt="General Network Modems manual" class="wp-image-168107" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-manual.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-manual-300x297.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-manual-50x50.jpg 50w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Modems-manual-108x108.jpg 108w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<p>To “Manually” configure specific data cards:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Both <strong>Roaming for all modems</strong> and <strong>Roaming for this modem </strong>box are checked by default.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Available Slots</strong> drop-down list to display available slots for configuration.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>Manual</strong> Network registration mode radio button. The Carrier panel opens.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Scan</strong> button to refresh the <strong>Carrier</strong> list. Make a selection, then input the setting information provided by the carrier.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Router configuration settings</strong></h2>



<p>In its standard deployment, the MLink can use one of its connections to support a data connection. When featured and deployed in router mode, the MLink can fully aggregate bandwidth.<br>Note: Router mode cannot be deployed in conjunction with a VLAN deployment, which is discussed in the next section.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>VLAN Mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p>VLAN mode is used for hotspot pass-through, providing a single default connection.</p>



<p>The VLAN settings are accessed on the network page. When disabled, it will offer to switch to router mode. Once enabled, the receiver, receiver port, and switch mode (layer 2) options will be displayed.</p>



<p>If neither router nor VLAN-only features are applied, none of these will be displayed.</p>



<p>To configure the pass-through in VLAN mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>General</strong> drop-down menu and select <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="436" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-168048" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu.jpg 436w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>LAN Settings</strong> panel will display.</li>



<li>The <strong>Router</strong> setting is set to <strong>Auto</strong> by default in the<strong> LAN settings</strong> panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg" alt="General Network LAN settings" class="wp-image-168065" style="width:642px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-300x147.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-768x376.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>VLAN</strong> panel.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> When the Router mode feature is enabled, the Switch to Router mode button appears in the VLAN panel.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="308" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN.jpg" alt="general Network VLAN" class="wp-image-158341" style="width:649px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN-300x95.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN-768x244.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<ol start="5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Move the <strong>VLAN slider</strong> to the right to enable VLAN.</li>



<li>Select a <strong>receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>server port</strong> of the receiver.</li>



<li>Enable <strong>Switch mode (layer 2)</strong> for a single LAN segment at both the MLink and Receiver locations. This is recommended for most users. If a separate LAN segment at each location is desired, leave this option disabled.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="324" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1.jpg" alt="General Network VLAN 1" class="wp-image-158348" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1-300x145.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Router mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The TVU router has two pass-through data modes, VLAN and TVU Router mode. In VLAN mode, the MLink TE5800 can be used as an internet hotspot using one of the data connections. In the advanced TVU Router mode, the MLink TE5800 can utilize and make available the full aggregate bandwidth of the system for pass-through traffic. As a result, the bandwidth can often exceed 200 Mbps.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> TVU Router is an advanced licensed feature that must be activated by TVU Support before it can be used.</p>
</blockquote>



<p><strong>Router</strong> can be selected in the top menu when <strong>Router mode</strong> is enabled.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="971" height="287" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu.jpg" alt="Router menu" class="wp-image-158355" style="width:664px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu.jpg 971w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu-300x89.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu-768x227.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 971px) 100vw, 971px" /></figure>



<p>To configure Router mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click <strong>Router</strong> in the top menu.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Switch to Router mode</strong> button, then click <strong>Yes</strong> in the pop-up message box.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="404" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button.jpg" alt="switch to Router mode button" class="wp-image-158362" style="width:674px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button-300x125.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button-768x320.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Router configuration panel opens. The <strong>Router slider</strong> is enabled by default.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Router Server</strong> drop-down menu and select your region.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Ethernet Host</strong> checkbox to enable services for up to 10 attached devices.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Users can switch to VLAN mode by clicking the <strong>Switch to VLAN mode</strong> button.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="653" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-1024x653.png" alt="Router mode panel" class="wp-image-158369" style="width:591px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-1024x653.png 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-300x191.png 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-768x490.png 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router.png 1035w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1024px) 100vw, 1024px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>TVU Router feature (Client connections)</strong></h2>



<p>If higher bandwidth is required when using a hotspot, the optional TVU Router feature can be enabled to allow clients connected to the MLink speeds of up to 200 Mbps.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong> tab and expand the LAN Settings panel.</li>



<li>Select <strong>Auto</strong> in the Router drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>IP address</strong> and <strong>Subnet Mask</strong>, then click<strong> Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg" alt="General Network LAN settings" class="wp-image-168065" style="width:584px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-300x147.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-768x376.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down on the <strong>Hotspot</strong> panel. Connected Clients will display in the <strong>Connected Clients</strong> device list.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="768" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Hotspot-1.jpg" alt="General Network Hotspot" class="wp-image-168114" style="width:583px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Hotspot-1.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Hotspot-1-300x267.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Hotspot-1-768x683.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Ethernet configuration DHCP IP</strong></h2>



<p>Ethernet settings are configured from the Receiver Control Config page.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The DHCP IP method, the address is automatically generated and cannot be manually entered.</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To configure your DHCP IP Ethernet settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Ethernet </strong>icon, or click <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="169" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Ethernet-icon.jpg" alt="Ethernet icon" class="wp-image-168121" style="width:491px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Ethernet-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Ethernet-icon-300x88.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Ethernet</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Configure IPv4</strong> drop-down menu and select the<strong> DHCP IP</strong> method.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Slot ID</strong> drop-down menu and select a slot number.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="861" height="407" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-DHCP.jpg" alt="General Network Ethernet DHCP" class="wp-image-168128" style="width:605px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-DHCP.jpg 861w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-DHCP-300x142.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-DHCP-768x363.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 861px) 100vw, 861px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Ethernet configuration Static IP</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your Ethernet settings for a Static IP address:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Configure IPv4</strong> drop-down menu and select the <strong>Static IP</strong> method.</li>



<li>Select the <strong>Slot ID</strong> number from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter a <strong>Static IP address</strong> in the <strong>IP Address</strong> field.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Subnet Mask</strong> in the <strong>Mask</strong> field.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Gateway</strong> in the <strong>Gateway</strong> field.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="861" height="507" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-Static.jpg" alt="General Network Ethernet Static" class="wp-image-168135" style="width:643px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-Static.jpg 861w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-Static-300x177.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-Ethernet-Static-768x452.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 861px) 100vw, 861px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Antenna configuration: RPS Link and MLink v8 model TE5800</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a757ccae-5fe2-44b0-9a74-be7a29827bf2"><strong>Antenna configuration RPS Link and</strong> <strong>MLink v8 model TE5800</strong></h2>



<p id="block-451c2118-121b-4536-af02-e4af7bd4e731">This section provides antenna configuration procedures for the RPS Link, MLink v7, and Rack Router v2 (Models RE975/980/990)</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8ba8f2bf-1593-4c51-9498-de360d8b8bae"><strong>RPS Link and MLink v</strong>8</h2>



<p id="block-6895b12c-1cfa-4507-88a8-33423e352b47">To configure antennas for the RPS Link and MLink model TE5800 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol id="block-412c07f8-ff8f-4613-839d-946bdeea9266" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8fc8ad01-4355-4b1e-bf9d-835d8bf09c8f"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png" alt="ANT 0 antenna configuration" class="wp-image-95518" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" id="block-9e34766f-f56b-4130-af90-26882a437815" class="wp-block-list">
<li>For RPS Link and MLinkV7 (TE5800) unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-fafca7b4-dfd9-4f78-9d35-f10814825bf0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="2x 5G modem and 4x 4G LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95504" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<p id="block-47854015-af18-41d8-be7c-e840e363f0d4">Notes:</p>



<ul id="block-64c625bd-3c38-4791-9de8-5bd5c1a3bdbb" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The 5G antenna is compatible with 5G modems and 4G/LTE modems, whereas the 4G/LTE antenna can only be used with 4G/LTE modems but not 5G modems.</li>



<li>In addition, by connecting a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 0 port for a 4G/LTE modem, the user has the option to connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 1 port for a 4G/LTE modem. Meaning both ANT 0 and ANT 1 ports can be used for the antenna connection. However, connecting the ANT 1 port on both RPS Link and MlinkV8 (TE5800) product lineup is optional and not mandatory.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-67b2fe08-bb4a-461f-aed8-b189d38342b6"><strong>Rack Router v2 (RE975/980/990)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-cf44781d-b314-4338-a3ab-e2e7c1748520">To configure the Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE975 unit, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol id="block-0823d8b8-f10a-4866-8ed7-0883b423f14e" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, and ANT 1 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8d208f97-fee2-43a6-be63-21feb4cf8175"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95665" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" id="block-cf224ac7-acc3-459d-9582-ecd5ee13a2ef" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To configure a Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE980 unit, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-64267436-18e0-4273-bed1-0cd8d113be34"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95672" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" id="block-7c1ba589-63f7-44e1-9cda-414f1a9978f1" class="wp-block-list">
<li>For a Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 5G modem configuration, also known as RE990, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-5e15dc31-fcfe-43b7-8b9e-c98065f4b5f0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95679" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced transmitter operations &#8211; Web interface controls</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-fd44bf6c-b9a4-465f-a972-74d22059c3b7"><strong>Advanced transmitter operations</strong> &#8211;<strong> Web interface controls</strong></h2>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ee3b4217-0ba3-4093-a150-8162c6c2fb0a"><strong>Advanced operations using an iPhone, smart device or laptop</strong></h2>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> There are two methods you can use to access the Mlink Advanced operations menu selections. The instructions in this chapter will show laptop display examples.</p>
</blockquote>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Method 1</strong></h3>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar icon</strong> to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Advanced operations are categorized in the following menus: <strong>Live</strong>, <strong>File</strong>, <strong>General</strong>, and <strong>Advanced</strong>. The following sections will address all five menus.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="MLink Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158412" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu-300x209.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Method 2</strong></h3>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using a laptop:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Advanced operations are categorized in the top drop-down menus. They are located at the top right of the system status screen: <strong>Live</strong>, <strong>File</strong>, <strong>Router</strong> (when enabled), <strong>General</strong>, and <strong>Advanced</strong>. The following topics will address all five menus.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="502" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Config-Home-screen.jpg" alt="Advanced config home screen" class="wp-image-168142" style="width:604px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Config-Home-screen.jpg 867w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Config-Home-screen-300x174.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Config-Home-screen-768x445.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu operations</strong></h2>



<p id="block-bd3db4c4-7063-4b5a-b5db-c58530f42901">The <strong>Live</strong> menu operations include the following settings:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Encoder</li>



<li>Receiver</li>



<li>Return Video</li>



<li>IP Source</li>



<li>VoIP/IFB</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b9f40106-8e7b-4075-aea5-cc08ca86e2cc"><strong>Live &#8211; Encoder</strong></h2>



<p id="block-5c908f15-58e8-4bc6-ad62-ef16399d01d5">Use the Encoder panel to configure video, audio encoding, and audio output mapping.</p>



<p>To access the Encoder panel:</p>



<ol id="block-5f80d0c9-2bc3-4ce4-99f8-38a213963ed7" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the<strong> Live</strong> menu, and then tap <strong>Encoder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="455" height="244" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-168149" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg 455w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu-300x161.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 455px) 100vw, 455px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Encoder status and controls</strong></h2>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> If the optional HEVC license is purchased, both H.265 Interview and H.265 Fast Motion mode will be available as selections.</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To configure Live video and audio encoding settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Select a <strong>Video Encoding</strong> mode that suits your application based on the following criteria:</li>
</ol>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>The encoding mode default is <strong>H.264</strong>.</li>



<li>If the optional HEVC license is purchased, both <strong>H.265 Interview</strong> and <strong>H.265 Fast Motion</strong> encoding modes will be available as selections.</li>



<li>Select the<strong> H.265 Interview</strong> radio button for shots containing limited motion, such as stand-ups or fixed shot interviews.</li>



<li>Use the <strong>H.265 Fast Motion</strong> radio button to optimize compression for video with significant motion, such as sports footage with high motion or fast pans and zooms.</li>
</ul>



<ol start="2" id="block-33f6af95-0b75-4302-87b6-757e7a1da8ff" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Select your <strong>Audio Encode</strong> panel configurations.</li>



<li>Select an <strong>Audio output mapping</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="767" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Encoder-panels.jpg" alt="Live Encoder panel" class="wp-image-168156" style="width:616px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Encoder-panels.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Encoder-panels-300x267.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Encoder-panels-768x683.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; Receiver</strong></h2>



<p>Use the Receiver panel to configure your receivers. The Receiver panel displays the receiver status and controls.</p>



<p>To access the Receiver panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, and then <strong>Receiver</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="455" height="244" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-168149" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg 455w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu-300x161.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 455px) 100vw, 455px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Receiver</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="669" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver.jpg" alt="live menu receiver" class="wp-image-168163" style="width:590px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-300x233.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-768x596.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Receiver status and controls</strong></h2>



<p>To select an alternate receiver, view its status, and set up and control a ”Live” transmission:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>To view and select a different receiver, click the Receiver <strong>Select R</strong> drop-down menu and select a receiver from the list.</li>



<li>Enable the<strong> Solo</strong> slider if you want a specific MLink to only display ‘Online” on the receiver you selected from the Receiver <strong>Select R</strong> drop-down menu.</li>



<li>In the <strong>Delay</strong> field, enter the desired transmission delay.</li>



<li>In the <strong>Bitrate (kbps)</strong> field, enter the desired transmission bitrate.</li>



<li>To enable the <strong>Low Bitrate Warning</strong>, enable the slider and enter a <strong>Low Bitrate</strong> <strong>Threshold</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="774" height="157" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-Low-bitrate-enabled.jpg" alt="Live Receiver Low bitrate enabled" class="wp-image-168170" style="width:580px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-Low-bitrate-enabled.jpg 774w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-Low-bitrate-enabled-300x61.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Receiver-Low-bitrate-enabled-768x156.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 774px) 100vw, 774px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your changes.</li>



<li>To <strong>Start</strong> or <strong>Stop</strong> the live transmission, click the <strong>Live</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; Return Video</strong></h2>



<p>The built-in HDMI output uses 720p by default, but can provide up to 1080p resolution and allows a user to send a confidence monitor or SDI source back to crews in the field. This onboard feature now supports viewing the return video feed on iPhone and iPad. Contact TVU Support for 1080p configuration.</p>



<p>To access the Return Video panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, and then <strong>Return Video</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="455" height="244" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-168149" style="width:573px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg 455w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu-300x161.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 455px) 100vw, 455px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Return Video</strong> panel opens. There are three RVF From selections: <strong>Receiver</strong>, <strong>Producer</strong>, and <strong>Partyline</strong>.</li>



<li>Select where you want the RVF to come from. If you choose <strong>Receiver</strong>, select a <strong>Receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Select where your source is coming <strong>from</strong>.</li>



<li>Select where you want your <strong>Output to</strong> go and click <strong>Start</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="671" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-for-Receiver.jpg" alt="Live Return Video for Receiver" class="wp-image-168177" style="width:573px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-for-Receiver.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-for-Receiver-300x233.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-for-Receiver-768x596.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>RVF from Producer selection:</strong></h3>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Producer.jpg" alt="Live Return Video Producer" class="wp-image-168184" style="width:584px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Producer.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Producer-300x147.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Producer-768x376.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>RVF from Partyline selection:</strong></h3>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="860" height="424" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Partyline.jpg" alt="Live Return Video Partyline" class="wp-image-168191" style="width:592px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Partyline.jpg 860w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Partyline-300x148.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-Return-Video-Partyline-768x379.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 860px) 100vw, 860px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; IP Source</strong></h2>



<p>The IP Source panel allows users to select an external IP source or camera source from the selection window to go live.</p>



<p>To access the IP Source panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, and then<strong> IP Source</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="455" height="244" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-168149" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg 455w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu-300x161.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 455px) 100vw, 455px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>IP Source</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>SDI</strong> or <strong>IP Source</strong> radio button.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>SDI</strong> radio button to display the camera source that is connected to the MLink.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="279" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source.jpg" alt="Live IP Source SDI" class="wp-image-168198" style="width:607px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-300x97.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-768x249.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<ol start="5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>IP Source</strong> radio button to add an IP Source with which to go live.</li>



<li>Enter the valid<strong> IP address</strong> in the field under an available source selection with which you want to go live, then click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your source selection.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Home</strong> button to send all IP sources in one matrix picture to the TVU MLink.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="573" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-IP-Source.jpg" alt="Live IP Source-  IP Source" class="wp-image-168205" style="width:619px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-IP-Source.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-IP-Source-300x199.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-IP-Source-IP-Source-768x511.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; VoIP/IFB</strong></h2>



<p>The VoIP/IFB panel enables you to:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Integrate VoIP/IFB audio in/out and from/to the transceiver.</li>



<li>Integrate IFB audio from the transceiver to the MLink.</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, and then <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="455" height="244" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-168149" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu.jpg 455w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-menu-300x161.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 455px) 100vw, 455px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong> panel opens. <strong>VoIP(Auto)</strong> is the default.</li>



<li>VoIP (Auto): Auto-select the VoIP technology based on the receiver software versions.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> A reboot is required when switching between VoIP and IFB if the receiver version is lower than v8.2.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="865" height="376" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB.jpg" alt="Live menu &gt; VoIP/IFB panel - Legacy VoIP" class="wp-image-168212" style="width:574px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB.jpg 865w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-300x130.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-768x334.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 865px) 100vw, 865px" /></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu > VoIP/IFB panel &#8211; Legacy VoIP</strong></h5>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="385" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-selected.jpg" alt="Live VoIP IFB selected" class="wp-image-168219" style="width:580px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-selected.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-selected-300x134.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-selected-768x343.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu &gt; VoIP/IFB panel &#8211; IFB</strong></h5>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="408" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-Embedded-Audio-menu.jpg" alt="Live VoIP IFB Embedded Audio menu" class="wp-image-168226" style="width:582px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-Embedded-Audio-menu.jpg 867w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-Embedded-Audio-menu-300x141.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Live-VoIP-IFB-Embedded-Audio-menu-768x361.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu > VoIP/IFB panel &#8211; Embedded Audio menu</strong></h5>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Make the appropriate selections.</li>



<li>Select an <strong>Embedded Audio</strong> if applicable.</li>



<li>Adjust the <strong>Audio level</strong> slider if applicable.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The File menu is located at the top right of the system status screen.</p>



<p>The File menu operations include:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>File Uploader</li>



<li>Sync Folder</li>



<li>Recorder</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens. Tap <strong>File</strong> &gt; <strong>File Uploader</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; File Uploader</strong></h2>



<p>The File Uploader panel lets you upload files to a specified receiver with the Auto Sync feature.</p>



<p>The Auto Sync feature lets you wirelessly transmit digital content from the MLink to the TVU receiver via a USB memory stick.</p>



<p>The MLink will auto-detect the memory stick and transfer its contents to its internal SSD. The content will then be available for wireless transmission to the TVU receiver.</p>



<p>To access the File Uploader panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, and then <strong>File Uploader</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="435" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-168233" style="width:486px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg 435w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 435px) 100vw, 435px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>File Uploader</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>From</strong>.</li>



<li>Choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>To</strong>.</li>



<li>Tap the<strong> Upload</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="701" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader.jpg" alt="File Uploader all to one" class="wp-image-168240" style="width:612px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-300x244.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-768x625.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>If you select the <strong>Customize</strong> radio button, choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>From</strong>.</li>



<li>Tap the <strong>Upload</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>For more information, refer to the “File-Based Workflows Reference” document&#8217;s topic “Using the Auto Sync feature with a USB stick.”</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="862" height="713" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-Customized.jpg" alt="File Uploader Customized" class="wp-image-168247" style="width:632px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-Customized.jpg 862w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-Customized-300x248.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-File-Uploader-Customized-768x635.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 862px) 100vw, 862px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; Sync Folder</strong></h2>



<p>The Sync Folder panel enables users to transfer and sync files to a specified receiver and monitor the progress.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Sync Folder</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, and then <strong>Sync Folder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="435" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-168233" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg 435w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 435px) 100vw, 435px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Sync Folder</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Select a <strong>receiver</strong> to sync your files to. The default is the last receiver you went live with.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>Set as Default</strong> slider to set a specific receiver as your default.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>For more information, refer to the “File-Based Workflows Reference” document&#8217;s topic “Auto Sync feature.”</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="416" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Sync-Folder.jpg" alt="File Sync Folder" class="wp-image-168254" style="width:599px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Sync-Folder.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Sync-Folder-300x145.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Sync-Folder-768x370.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; Recorder</strong></h2>



<p>The Recorder tab allows users to select, mark, download, rename, and upload recorded files.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Recorder</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, and then <strong>Recorder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="435" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-168233" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu.jpg 435w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 435px) 100vw, 435px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Recorder</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the File-based Workflow Reference guide “Working with recorded content” topic for detailed information about how to use the Record feature.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="819" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Recorder.jpg" alt="File recorder" class="wp-image-168261" style="width:616px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Recorder.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/File-Recorder-246x300.jpg 246w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The General Operations menu includes:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Network</li>



<li>Firmware Upgrade</li>



<li>Region</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Advanced operations</strong> menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens. Tap <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General &#8211; Network</strong></h2>



<p>The <strong>Network </strong>panel enables users to:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Configure LAN settings</li>



<li>Users can complete the Hotspot configuration for client connections in the Hotspot panel.</li>



<li>Create additional WiFi connections with additional USB WiFi adapter support. Users can enable or disable WiFi from the UI. The WiFi will automatically redial if network connectivity fails.</li>



<li>Configure Ethernet</li>



<li>Configure Modems</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Network</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> menu, and then <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="436" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-168268" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1.jpg 436w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Network</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="535" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1.jpg" alt="General Network panel" class="wp-image-158552" style="width:602px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1-300x239.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Router</strong> drop-down menu and select an option. <strong>Auto</strong> is the default.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="860" height="421" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-Router-Auto.jpg" alt="General Network LAN settings Router Auto" class="wp-image-168275" style="width:607px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-Router-Auto.jpg 860w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-Router-Auto-300x147.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Network-LAN-settings-Router-Auto-768x376.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 860px) 100vw, 860px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The Network configuration information is explained in “Network configuration.”</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General &#8211; Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>



<p>You can check for firmware updates in the <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> menu, and then <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="436" height="222" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-168268" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1.jpg 436w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-menu-1-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 436px) 100vw, 436px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>The following message appears when a firmware update is unavailable.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="363" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Firmware-Upgrade.jpg" alt="General Firmware Upgrade" class="wp-image-168282" style="width:521px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Firmware-Upgrade.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Firmware-Upgrade-300x126.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/General-Firmware-Upgrade-768x323.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>When a new Firmware version is available, you will have the option to upgrade from this panel.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The Advanced menu includes:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Progressive Download</li>



<li>SelfCheck</li>



<li>NTP</li>



<li>MediaMind Story</li>



<li>MediaMind Setting</li>



<li>Messages</li>



<li>Token</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the Advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Progressive Download</strong></h2>



<p>The Progressive Download feature is enabled in the Progressive Download panel and is controlled by using the record button on the video camera (e.g., Camcorder).</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Progressive Download</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, and then <strong>Progressive Download</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Progressive Download</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="861" height="393" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Progressive-Download-enabled.jpg" alt="Advanced Progressive Download enabled" class="wp-image-168296" style="width:656px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Progressive-Download-enabled.jpg 861w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Progressive-Download-enabled-300x137.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Progressive-Download-enabled-768x351.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 861px) 100vw, 861px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To use the Progressive Download feature, Move the <strong>Enable</strong> slider to the right until green.</li>



<li>The receiver is specified in the <strong>File</strong> menu &gt; <strong>Sync folder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; NTP</strong></h2>



<p>The NTP panel enables users to lock and synchronize an NTP host IP to the domain controller.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>NTP</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, and then <strong>NTP</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>NTP</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>The Lock to <strong>Auto (Default)</strong> selection will lock to the closest available Host IP.</li>



<li>The NTP Host IP should display “<strong>Synchronized</strong>” in green.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="867" height="369" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-NTP.jpg" alt="Advanced NTP" class="wp-image-168303" style="width:710px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-NTP.jpg 867w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-NTP-300x128.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-NTP-768x327.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 867px) 100vw, 867px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; MediaMind Story</strong></h2>



<p>The MediaMind Story panel allows you to add a Story name to a progressive download file.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>MediaMind Story</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>MediaMind Story</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>MediaMind Story</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Enter a<strong> Story Name</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Tag</strong> to include the <strong>Story Name</strong> in the Progressive Download file name.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="864" height="498" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Story.jpg" alt="Advanced MediaMind Story" class="wp-image-168310" style="width:679px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Story.jpg 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Story-300x173.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Story-768x443.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 864px) 100vw, 864px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; MediaMind Setting</strong></h2>



<p>The MediaMind Setting panel enables you to configure live settings for face, speech, and speaker recognition up to four languages when you are using the TVU MediaMind Appliance (MMA) service.</p>



<p>Whether it is a live stream, an IP video stream, or a video file, the TVU MediaMind Appliance (MMA) uses AI technology to automatically generate metadata, organize, and search for content.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, and then <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Configure your live settings for MMA and click <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="857" height="577" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Setting.jpg" alt="Advanced MediaMind Setting" class="wp-image-168317" style="width:688px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Setting.jpg 857w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Setting-300x202.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-MediaMind-Setting-768x517.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 857px) 100vw, 857px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Messages</strong></h2>



<p>The Messages panel enables you to send and receive messages between the MLink and transceivers.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Messages</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, and then <strong>Messages</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Messages</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="863" height="503" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Messages.jpg" alt="Advanced Messages" class="wp-image-168324" style="width:650px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Messages.jpg 863w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Messages-300x175.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Messages-768x448.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 863px) 100vw, 863px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>In the <strong>To</strong> field, enter the recipient’s TVU receivers’ <strong>PID</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter your message in the <strong>Message</strong> field and tap the <strong>Send</strong> button.</li>



<li>Expand the <strong>Received Message</strong> caret to view messages that were received by the MLink.</li>



<li>Expand the<strong> Sent Message</strong> caret to view messages that were sent by the MLink.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Token</strong></h2>



<p>The Token panel allows you to create and configure tokens. Tokens are used to allow a recipient temporary access to your device.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Token</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, and then <strong>Token</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="448" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-168289" style="object-fit:cover" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu.jpg 448w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-menu-300x179.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 448px) 100vw, 448px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Token</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Create Token</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter the device <strong>PID</strong>. The device name automatically populates.</li>



<li>Enter the recipient’s <strong>email address</strong>.</li>



<li>Set up a <strong>Valid Time</strong> range: (<strong>D</strong>) Days, (<strong>H</strong>) Hours, (<strong>M</strong>) Minutes, and (<strong>S</strong>) Seconds for the token to be active.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Create Token</strong>.</li>



<li>In the Set Token panel, click<strong> GetMsgPipe Token</strong> and enter the <strong>Token String</strong>, and then click <strong>Set Token</strong>.</li>



<li>To <strong>Reset</strong> the <strong>Password</strong>, enter and confirm the new password and click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>



<li>To <strong>Reset</strong> the <strong>Valid Time</strong>, select the <strong>receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu, set the <strong>Valid time</strong>, then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="1094" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Token.jpg" alt="Advanced Token" class="wp-image-168331" style="width:632px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Token.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Token-184x300.jpg 184w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/Advanced-Token-629x1024.jpg 629w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<p id="block-10fdae2b-4209-470d-ba55-0d2d3a253774"></p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-4004cdc3-5238-4a23-af11-2201e0b7424c"><strong>Product Specifications:</strong></h2>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-472614b5-e4b4-4582-a8ce-2ddc21ba55a5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="566" height="632" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec.jpg" alt="MLink TE5500 prod spec" class="wp-image-158208" style="aspect-ratio:0.9121951219512195;width:811px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec.jpg 566w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec-269x300.jpg 269w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 566px) 100vw, 566px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e85ddcaf-4495-491b-88f7-4a512f6759aa"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="554" height="683" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/MLink-Model-TE5800-Peoduct-Spec.jpg" alt="MLink Model TE5800 Product Spec" class="wp-image-168338" style="aspect-ratio:0.8037518037518038;width:817px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/MLink-Model-TE5800-Peoduct-Spec.jpg 554w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2026/03/MLink-Model-TE5800-Peoduct-Spec-243x300.jpg 243w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 554px) 100vw, 554px" /></figure>



<p></p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p>© Copyright 2026 TVU Networks Corporation. All rights reserved in all media.<br>Document Part Number: TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5800 QSUG Rev A EN 02-2026</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-v7-4-and-te5800-v8-0-user-guide/">TVU MLink TE5500 v7.4 and TE5800 v8.0 User Guide</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide v7.4</title>
		<link>https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide-v7-4/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Cynthia]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 06 Aug 2025 12:40:34 +0000</pubDate>
				<guid isPermaLink="false">https://editwww.tvunetworks.com/?post_type=tips&#038;p=158200</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models.</p>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide-v7-4/">TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide v7.4</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[
<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-227fc3b4-c9e5-4ed2-af1e-45f928f47159"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1033" height="584" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-1.jpg" alt="Featured Image Template  TVU MLink v7.4" class="wp-image-158222" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-1.jpg 1033w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-1-300x170.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-1-1024x579.jpg 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-v7-1-768x434.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1033px) 100vw, 1033px" /></figure>



<p id="block-6d1b45f9-aac7-47ac-9913-c1122b83b354">TVU MLink is the complete and versatile rack-mount IP video solution designed specifically for use in vans, trucks, sport utility vehicles, and in fixed studios. MLink uses all cellular 3G/4G/LTE/5G, satellite, microwave, WiFi, and Ethernet connections to transmit a high-quality and reliable video stream in HD with sub-second latency. A stream can be started with any type of connection, with additional ones added or removed at any time without video disruption.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Introduction, setup, and base operation</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-045c245e-a8b9-47cd-85e6-565850402244"><strong>Introduction, setup, and base operation</strong></h2>



<p id="block-16f0602a-c8d1-4ffb-b4f3-592f4336d896">The TVU MLink features Inverse StatMux Plus (ISX) technology for dependable video broadcast in even the most challenging transmission environments, such as a moving vehicle. TVU MLink uses IP67-rated external roof-mounted antennas to ensure the best possible signal strength.</p>



<p id="block-1818b527-f7ec-433f-954e-e688575aa0d3">The TVU MLink transmitter also features the new TVU 7 platform, which supports the TVU Partyline feature.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-19ab3f8a-f475-403d-bb36-fe3e147acb86"><strong>TVU MLink overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-1d024a38-2317-4f13-981f-c914e2d0232d">TVU MLink models TE5500 and TE5700 are a part of the TVU ecosystem. The video streams from MLink can also be easily distributed to multiple locations using TVU Grid® for live video switching, routing, and distribution solutions.</p>



<p id="block-a8926293-24ad-4e92-81ed-2623feab10a7">The TVU MLink TE5500 transmitter (encoder) uses the TVU Command Center Web interface, which provides a cloud-based centralized management and control solution for all TVU devices and services. For detailed information about TVU Command Center, refer to the “TVU Command Center Setup and User Guide.“</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image" id="block-aff6a404-0af6-4b61-ace9-c2e53397bfb6"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/command-center-3-1024x623.png" alt="This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is command-center-3-1024x623.png"/></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	</div>

<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Features overview</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-31f0298a-b322-417a-8a56-dba858e31ffe"><strong>Features overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-aeb3a23a-94e3-47e1-ab09-72fe08a7e603"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5500 contribution encoder:</strong></p>



<ul id="block-3765adad-080e-4240-a0b3-7f8776b84e47" class="wp-block-list">
<li>MLink TE5500 is an ISX transmitter in a 1RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats 4K 25/30P, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Ultra-low latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 SDI-embedded audio channels or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Single Ethernet port for commodity internet connectivity.</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Status monitor output via DP or HDMI.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8 Mbps CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (Package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Supports HTTP, UDP, RTMP, and RTMPS protocols.</li>



<li>Directly compatible with TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU Channel, and TVU CloudR.</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-8ff9b288-013e-49bc-b60f-81fed6d3dcea"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5700 &#8211; ISX field / Remote uplink:</strong></p>



<ul id="block-d21ce1f3-eb64-4c42-a77a-3effbed917cc" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The MLink TE5700 is an ISX transmitter in a 2RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Aggregates any mix of cellular, Ethernet, WiFi, satellite, and microwave.</li>



<li>Supports up to 6 embedded LTE or 5G modems. Ships standard with external IP67 rated external LTE antennas (3m cables) or optional 5G antennas.</li>



<li>Has the ability to support a mix of 5G (optional) /LTE/4G and 3G modems (internal to the chassis) with external SMA antenna connections (4x SMA per 5G Modem, 2x SMA per LTE modem). The MLink TE5700 allows modem antennas to connect directly to the chassis, simplifying cabling.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats, including 4K (25/30P), 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Super low-latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 channels of SDI-embedded audio or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8Mb/s CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>File upload management; Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Easily accessible front panel SIM card slots for easy configuration.</li>



<li>Front panel LCD interface for easy configuration, control, and monitoring.</li>



<li>Embedded outbound WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for use with ISX transmissions.</li>



<li>Embedded HotSpot WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for access point use (Internet connectivity).</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Optional TVU Router support (TVU model RE980 only) which turns MLink into a high-speed access point in virtually any location. All data connections are aggregated together to provide high-speed connectivity.</li>



<li>Optional dual power supply</li>



<li>Directly compatible with the TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU CloudR, and TVU Channel.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-3db1face-0b93-48b2-8a2d-2139a32db887"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="476" height="452" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png" alt="ENG vehicle configuration example" class="wp-image-95581" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png 476w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example-300x285.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 476px) 100vw, 476px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	About this guide</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-9aac6628-8ccf-4df0-9bfc-aac5cf04dbd8"><strong>About this guide</strong></h2>



<p id="block-73b73475-1841-4baf-8ddc-f00857636c36">This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models, the TVU MLink Model TE5500 (for Ethernet applications) and the TVU MLink Model TE5700 transmitters.</p>



<p id="block-f0e5aada-3c50-4b35-8b60-1d103cd6a5d4">Main topics:</p>



<ul id="block-2855e063-7cae-4fe0-bf76-5de665484dd5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Setting up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5700</li>



<li>Using the faceplate controls and operations panel</li>



<li>Configuring, monitoring, and controlling the TVU MLink transmitter using the Web UI</li>



<li>Operating the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5700</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-cf23d1a6-8a14-435a-9bd0-30da9c802077"><strong>Model TE5500 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-41fae7e2-bc62-474c-9658-b3072d805fd6">The TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> USB ports on the front panel are intended to support only a keyboard and mouse. Do not connect USB modems, network adapters, and like devices into these ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-51eb4480-fbcc-4c9f-89cc-1d1587027e09"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="141" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel" class="wp-image-95735" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png 528w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel-300x80.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e1055d03-65f7-4aaa-ae14-59956fb1a7ca"><strong>Model TE5500 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-9b344a6b-c28b-4df5-864e-55fa037b397f">The TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel features the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The USB ports support up to four USB devices from any of the six ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7e07b14f-18c3-4f7a-95fc-50a68ddf29de"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="531" height="180" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel connections" class="wp-image-95742" style="aspect-ratio:2.95;width:688px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png 531w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 531px) 100vw, 531px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5700 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-63f82d77-36bf-4f9b-a0dc-fdd6a4ce7310"><strong>Model TE5700 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-4745b904-4279-4cb6-9de4-2bef02b0f53e">The TVU MLink model TE5700 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls. The TE5700 ships with 3 standard LTE dome antennas to support 6 modems.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7365d3c0-4b3d-4b8e-9faf-ed771c2a75d5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="512" height="177" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5700 front panel" class="wp-image-95749" style="aspect-ratio:2.8926553672316384;width:742px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png 512w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel-300x104.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 512px) 100vw, 512px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-774c131e-d5c6-490a-907b-a7c3288d4a23"><strong>Model TE5700 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f79b08c4-6237-445a-a0f7-31dd381384c2">The TVU MLink model TE5700 and rear panel feature the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The top left USB port supports WiFi while the bottom right port supports hotspot functionality (for TE5700 support only)</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4803474f-7176-4e4f-ba4a-b18300a14db3"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="538" height="206" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5700 rear panel" class="wp-image-95756" style="aspect-ratio:2.6116504854368934;width:773px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel.png 538w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel-300x115.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 538px) 100vw, 538px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Before you begin</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f9c911de-af64-4ba3-ad48-c5ee57b4062d"><strong>Before you begin</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f996f828-633d-4b49-84ff-15af08fec6d8">Complete the following procedures to set up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and TE5700 transmitters.<br>Refer to the front and rear panel overviews for MLink transmitter connection descriptions and locations to assist with the setup procedures. Contact TVU Support if you have any difficulties during the setup process.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-727d10fd-c597-429a-9b2d-cf96f2f7fec7"><strong>MLink TE5500 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-04866067-8ee5-4e57-8903-5fe200b8ecdb">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5500 transmitter. All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate:</p>



<ol id="block-a6688ead-48c6-4771-abc3-1c9d0adf4b0b" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect a computer display connector to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the top left rear panel USB port to enable WiFi if required.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the bottom right rear panel USB port to enable hotspot functionality if required.</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to the left Ethernet port on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="7" id="block-645bb35a-3fc3-4e3e-96ff-7d215516415f" class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5700 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-028c6532-4a3f-4468-83e8-969ed834d54b"><strong>MLink TE5700 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-b71b061e-c3b1-4030-ab61-89272a6bd692">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5700 transmitter:</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol id="block-2705eff2-62d4-4a5f-adf5-bbc0e0110913" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect the computer display to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>If required, connect WiFi MIMO antennas to the top left WiFi connectors to support the MIMO mode configuration for LTE downloading (does not support uploading.)</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to one of the two GbE Ethernet ports on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the antenna connector to the modem connection on the rear panel:</li>
</ol>



<ul id="block-ad52d0e1-b733-40cf-afb9-db43293aba90" class="wp-block-list">
<li>LTE dome antenna (3 antennas) with two connectors. One antenna supports 2 modems and should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>



<li>5G modem antenna (one per modem) with four connectors. The 5G antenna should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-9ef0e27e-29c2-4c84-aad7-1687ebf90691"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="484" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png" alt="WiFi MIMO antennas" class="wp-image-95497" style="aspect-ratio:1.5764462809917354;width:495px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png 763w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas-300x190.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5bb7d6fe-b593-4472-8f41-86ed39d1f4e5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="381" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png" alt="LTE dome antenna" class="wp-image-95623" style="aspect-ratio:1.6377952755905512;width:463px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna-300x183.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4c384503-c628-40e0-9063-6cfbd85734c6"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="656" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png" alt="5G modem antenna" class="wp-image-95511" style="aspect-ratio:1.5508274231678487;width:468px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png 656w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna-300x193.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 656px) 100vw, 656px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" id="block-b26aacbc-eaff-47ac-882d-1b034a503e07" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="7" id="block-40118d21-0ab8-4396-a416-5c64bdb459b9" class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	MLink TE5700 front panel controls and operations</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f34630c5-1e1f-42fc-9ce6-7396c3f93a12"><strong>MLink TE5700 front panel controls and operations</strong></h2>



<p id="block-af727db7-ccfb-4b6f-81cf-c6866731eab9">You will use the control panel buttons to access common functions on the device, such as switching receivers, transmitting modes, or triggering a live transmission.</p>



<p id="block-1199da4c-2dee-4cf9-9b00-cd4daea6fff8">The control panel button functions are as follows:</p>



<ul id="block-a0131ccf-4a6b-4da5-ad5c-1b221342d614" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the<strong> Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to switch between paired receivers or transceivers.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>green check button</strong> to go live or to confirm an action.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>Red X button</strong> to stop a live transmission or deny an action.</li>



<li>Use the <strong>Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrows</strong> to switch between preset transmission modes.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-41795cdd-4ae6-4c5d-9d7d-b94369c82d92"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="539" height="155" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png" alt=" Control panel buttons" class="wp-image-95539" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png 539w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons-300x86.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 539px) 100vw, 539px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5700 On and Off</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b72ebb1f-1314-4225-8eee-4adb02564570"><strong>Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5700 On and Off</strong></h2>



<p id="block-09ebd495-d9d2-4342-a911-53ea44204272">Complete the following steps to power on/off and restart the MLink transmitter:</p>



<ol id="block-98812fa0-b63d-4fc5-b8d2-862811408755" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To power On the TVU MLink, press the power button in the front panel&#8217;s left lower section.<br><br>The name and PID number of the unit displays on the MLink LCD screen during boot-up.</li>



<li>To power Off the TVU MLink, press and hold the power button down for more than four seconds.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The TVU MLink will automatically restart if the power button is pressed and held in for less than four seconds.</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c401d83b-fce7-4474-bc0a-b47e77a7ad85"><strong>TVU MLink TE5700 front LCD panel and functions</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ca76c0ae-9d76-417c-ab7f-8312d8300364">The MLink front LCD display panel allows the user to view the status of the following functions:</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-2cdef7f4-368b-4e01-bd0d-aac59557f512"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="338" height="156" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink front LCD panel" class="wp-image-95707" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png 338w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel-300x138.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1624205c-0d2b-451d-96f7-b39188706975"><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong></h2>



<p id="block-811a979c-6beb-482d-a6ac-97055a3da2f9">The transmission status monitor displays the current transmission status of the paired TVU One, referred to as the “TVU Pack.”</p>



<ul id="block-2b31b680-e067-42a6-99eb-0fbfa0e55c51" class="wp-block-list">
<li>If the display is flashing “LIVE,” it indicates the transmission is live.</li>



<li>If a camera or input source is not connected to the TVU MLink transmitter, the LCD panel displays “Online.”</li>



<li>If a video source is detected, but the session is not Live, the display will show “STDBY” to indicate it is in Standby mode.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-053a5c96-2265-4e27-9c10-43758524dca9"><strong>Receiver name</strong></h2>



<p id="block-104919fe-bc7e-4232-b5a7-833bb117f8b1">The currently selected receiver name is displayed on line 2.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-bd8294f3-4b0c-4d15-8504-f15296240397"><strong>Preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ef2503ec-be68-4119-a30d-2ddcafb8d76b">The transmission mode status for the selected receiver is displayed under the receiver name.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b6129e97-a166-475d-adbe-ed6de373c630"><strong>Input</strong></h2>



<p id="block-a1011731-4825-4d79-a904-7f5b641fb98f">The input source is displayed on line 4.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a0a5a91e-a4fe-4e78-b02a-25e0afb46b96"><strong>Using the TVU MLink controls and operations panel</strong></h2>



<p id="block-88725c0d-e21c-421f-87f4-9953a87fecd0">Complete the following procedures in steps 2 through 4 to use the TVU MLink front panel controls and operations functions. The MLink status displays on the LCD screen.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the following “LCD status display panel” figure unless otherwise indicated for this section.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-b85be09c-78ff-4779-9c51-6bd755e5759b"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="212" height="108" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LCD-status-display-panel.png" alt="" class="wp-image-95616" style="aspect-ratio:1.962962962962963;width:448px;height:auto"/></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8182a10c-316f-4939-97d5-463498e00f0c">Figure reference: LCD status display panel</h5>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d9cc179-6deb-4aa2-99ad-8885682fcd6b"><strong>Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-05c58cea-a05b-4290-86b9-829a18648759" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Locate the currently selected transceiver’s name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 2 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel. Press the <strong>Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to scroll through and select the available receiver.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD panel.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-6a6ffade-d9af-4818-b6ab-478910b8dd97">The default preset transmission mode may be different for each receiver or transceiver. You may see the preset transmission mode change when switching between other receivers and transceivers.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-5db3dcbb-7269-4f88-8cac-07e130a498bc"><strong>Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-96c971f3-869e-4ad4-8f36-db40f3457a71" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Locate the preset transmission modes displayed under the receiver name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 3 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel<strong> Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrow keys</strong> to scroll through and select the desired option.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD display panel.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1ed36f76-e25b-4073-9196-0ebc031c4783"><strong>Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</strong></h2>



<ol id="block-fbd091e2-c4d6-40a1-8d1f-59796c36cf6d" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Before going “Live,” connect the camera or input source to the MLink transmitter. If a camera or input source is not connected, “Online” displays in the top left corner of the LCD panel.</li>



<li>Verify that the camera or input source is connected. The LCD panel displays “STDBY” in the top left corner of the LCD panel. Refer to callout<strong> ( 1 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To go “Live,” press the <strong>green check mark button</strong> on the front control panel. The transmitter will prompt you to start a live transmission in the LCD display.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e393ceb4-cb15-4de9-a5bd-a6bd85e744b5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="359" height="121" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png" alt="Go Live action display" class="wp-image-95602" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png 359w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display-300x101.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 359px) 100vw, 359px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" id="block-c081d575-7a67-499f-adfc-d96e45a39110" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To confirm, click the<strong> green check mark button</strong> once more.</li>



<li>To deny the request, click the front panel controls <strong>red X button</strong>. The selected preset transmission mode and paired receiver name will display on the LCD panel.</li>



<li>When the transmitter is in “Live” mode, the word “LIVE” (as shown in the go-live confirmation display) blinks in the top left corner of the LCD panel. The variable bitrate will also display in real-time next to the flashing “LIVE” indicator.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-d72687bf-4727-492d-9445-49a8d20bd714"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="372" height="131" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png" alt="Live confirmation display" class="wp-image-95609" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png 372w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation-300x106.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 372px) 100vw, 372px" /></figure>



<p id="block-62acf93f-df1a-4113-9d5a-bcdc5a6ab448">The selected preset transmission mode, paired receiver name, and input source are displayed.</p>



<ol start="7" id="block-21b72411-0130-4165-a9ca-31a06bb9b719" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the <strong>red X button</strong> on the control panel to stop a live transmission. The unit will prompt you to stop the live transmission, as shown in the following figure.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7c5c5a0f-6e0d-490d-baa2-eee6b8a61fde"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="366" height="125" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png" alt="Go live cancellation 2" class="wp-image-96642" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png 366w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 366px) 100vw, 366px" /></figure>



<ol start="8" id="block-e85217b5-2d41-4952-8250-23fd16f89da0" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To confirm that you want to stop the transmission, press the front panel&#8217;s controls&#8217; <strong>green check mark button</strong>. Then, click the <strong>red X button</strong> on the front panel controls to deny the request.</li>



<li>After the live transmission has stopped, the screen returns to (“STDBY”) mode.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 5 &#8211; Using the display or HDMI port</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ad48fefc-7c24-42c0-82c8-d00c0cceb21a"><strong>Step 5 &#8211; Use the Display or HDMI port to view the Video preview and transmission status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-fc580d6c-1b9f-4c55-ac24-14bca291ecf6">To view a detailed view of the status screen, complete the following steps to connect a monitor to the Display or HDMI port on the TVU MLink rear panel:</p>



<ol id="block-b1224f7e-3bf6-46bb-81fb-05ed88238219" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a Display or HDMI monitor cable to the appropriate port on the TVU MLink to view the detailed status display screen.</li>



<li>Connect a camera to the TVU MLink and power on both the camera and MLink devices. The Video Preview Transmission screen displays.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-53a2e8e3-a716-4b42-8422-902585af82be"><strong>Video Preview Transmission screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-e4f0afda-fd2f-499b-ac08-d75df99cc82d">Refer to the following “Video preview transmission screen” figure and the live TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-3927a50f-ad5f-4aa1-9c46-abe85d33d77a"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="339" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen.png" alt="Video Preview Transmission screen" class="wp-image-95490" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen-300x169.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<p id="block-9e975f9c-6871-4231-a895-2bea81985d3e">TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions:</p>



<ul id="block-e9b13133-fea5-4d8d-9e49-5586cc6de8e5" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Input preview</strong> &#8211; Shows the live picture from the camera and captured in TVU MLink.</li>



<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the TVU Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator displays black/gray, the TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul id="block-63aad145-ac79-482e-a680-f05d8050f8a9" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Data card status monitor:</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-a8d714ba-2126-4f24-8362-0bd30e2c2aff">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the Pack will appear as green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The green status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The red status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The black status indicates there is no card.</p>



<ul id="block-22675e3b-085f-49f8-8941-9a13d776674e" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number. Be sure to have this information available when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor</strong> &#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>



<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e7053efb-6f3b-4504-b963-baa7ca244f54"><strong>Standby video input status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6aa5f754-5bcb-41d0-808f-e457670fcd95">Refer to the following “Standby video input status screen” and the TVU MLink standby video status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-f268236b-72b5-43ee-bff1-2366de2179ce"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="348" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen.png" alt="Standby video input status screen" class="wp-image-95693" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen-300x173.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ul id="block-658e7387-cca0-48ba-92f3-d138b070aece" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Connection status:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-5fbbb05e-32a8-4686-9cc7-62424ff6e797">&#8211; Displays the status and IP of each network connection. The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul id="block-03e3c539-d79e-4cbc-98eb-039beee00497" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator is black/gray, TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul id="block-3cb1933f-5fe4-4279-a187-b722edd34dfd" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>Data card status monitor:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-6162844d-0102-4641-837d-7d9938a0a9a8">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul id="block-6746a05e-f5c0-4f47-9ea3-bf8a098153da" class="wp-block-list">
<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>



<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number and is used when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor </strong>&#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced Configuration</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1096bb2e-7122-4498-9515-5500907a2119"><strong>Advanced Configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-2a8633c8-f068-486e-b46c-b48bb42af067">This section provides instructions for advanced configuration settings for hotspot, WiFi, modem, microwave, router, and BGAN configuration for the MLink model TE5700 transmitter.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d80faff-c0c4-4f24-8e3f-fa1a77b89c60"><strong>TVU MLink system status monitoring and control using a Web browser on an iPhone or a smart mobile device</strong></h2>



<p id="block-23344aa8-5a67-4bde-a8e6-123ddc57adef">The TVU Transmitter&#8217;s operational status can be monitored, and various parts of the transmission can be controlled from a Web browser. This interface can be accessed using a standard web browser connected to the TVU MLink TE5700 hotspot USB port on the rear transmitter panel.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-768fedfb-caef-4e63-9e01-de29877b4e6f"><strong>Connecting the MLink TE5500 to the internal hotspot (optional)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-15a0120a-43b6-4ea0-a9b4-df8fd3304421">Complete the following steps to configure the TVU MLink transmitter to the internal hotspot using your iPhone or a smart mobile device:</p>



<ol id="block-d3b9bfba-fd18-481d-bad8-35b331cbb873" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect the TP-Link WiFi dongle to the rear panel bottom right USB port.</li>



<li>Search for the Hotspot on your iPhone/smart device, then, when prompted, enter the case-sensitive SSID:
<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVUPACK_XXXX<br>(Where X is the last 4 digits of the MLink’s PID)</li>



<li>The default password is the last 8 digits of the MLink PID</li>



<li>All password characters are uppercase. The password can be changed in the Web UI if desired.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>



<ol start="3" id="block-386349a3-2223-4408-b12c-281b874a5074" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect to the SSID using your iPhone/smart device. Refer to the following “TVU MLink status; video and network screen” for examples of how the status screens display on a smart device Web browser.</li>



<li>Once the connection is established, open a web browser and enter the following IP address in the address line to see the transmitter&#8217;s &#8220;System status&#8221;: <strong>http://192.168.4.1</strong></li>



<li>The MLink System Status panel will display.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>MLink System status panel overview</strong></h2>



<p>The System status panel provides access to the following information.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5a0616c8-6f56-40e2-ab82-262664494ad8"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="333" height="455" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-system-status-panel.jpg" alt="MLink system status panel" class="wp-image-158229" style="aspect-ratio:0.8590604026845637;width:423px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-system-status-panel.jpg 333w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-system-status-panel-220x300.jpg 220w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 333px) 100vw, 333px" /></figure>



<p id="block-626f8a6f-d636-4579-8b12-75bcb64cefd8">The MLink transmitter System status panel provides access to the following information:</p>



<p><strong>(A) MLink advanced operations icon</strong> &#8211; Tap the three-bar icon to open the advanced operations menu. This opens the Live, File,<br>General, and Advanced menu selection panels.. Refer to “MLink Advanced operations &#8211; Web interface controls” for more information.<br><strong>(B) Configuration shortcut icons</strong> &#8211; These icons open the WiFi, HotSpot, Modem, and Ethernet configuration panels.<br><strong>(C) System panel</strong> &#8211; Displays the MLink mode, version, PID, CPU capacity, and temperature.<br><strong>(D) Network panel</strong> &#8211; Modem card information including type, connectivity, and IP address all organized by slot number.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="586" height="637" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Network-panel-system-status.jpg" alt="MLink Network panel system status" class="wp-image-158236" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Network-panel-system-status.jpg 586w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Network-panel-system-status-276x300.jpg 276w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 586px) 100vw, 586px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(E) IFB/VoIP panel</strong> &#8211; This panel allows the user to change the audio level of the IFB function.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="345" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel.jpg" alt="IFB VoIP panel" class="wp-image-158243" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel-300x180.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(F) Video panel</strong> &#8211; Displays video transmission information and status.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="659" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Video-panel-system-status.jpg" alt="Video panel system status" class="wp-image-158250" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Video-panel-system-status.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Video-panel-system-status-262x300.jpg 262w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<p><strong>(G) Power panel</strong> &#8211; Contains the reboot and power off buttons.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="588" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Power-panel.jpg" alt="Power panel" class="wp-image-158257" style="width:582px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Power-panel.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Power-panel-300x182.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Power-panel-768x466.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c5db7c4c-272f-4888-a06d-4e09368dde6c"><strong>Network configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The Network configuration panel allows users to monitor and control all aspects of MLink network connectivity.</p>



<p>To open the <strong>Network</strong> configuration panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>General</strong> drop-down menu and select <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="619" height="315" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu.jpg" alt="general menu" class="wp-image-158264" style="width:590px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu.jpg 619w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 619px) 100vw, 619px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>LAN Settings</strong> panel will display.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="968" height="579" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings.jpg" alt="LAN settings" class="wp-image-158271" style="width:610px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings.jpg 968w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-300x179.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-768x459.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 968px) 100vw, 968px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>In the LAN settings panel, set the MLink&#8217;s local LAN address. The default IP address is <strong>192.168.4.1</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Subnet Mask</strong> and select a <strong>Router</strong> setting from the drop-down menu; the default is <strong>Auto</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>WiFi configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The WiFi panel provides configuration information and access to change the WiFi settings. The MLink TE5500 can optionally support multiple WiFi connections by purchasing optional hardware. For more information, contact TVU Networks support.</p>



<p>When multiple WiFi adapters are connected, you can scan available slots for WiFi adapters and configure the WiFi login information using the TVU MLink WiFi setup and configuration panel.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring WiFi</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your WiFi settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>WiFi</strong> icon.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="167" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/WiFi-icon.jpg" alt="WiFi icon" class="wp-image-158278" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/WiFi-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/WiFi-icon-300x87.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>WiFi</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>WiFi</strong> slider.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="362" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel.jpg" alt="Ethernet icon WiFi panel" class="wp-image-158285" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-WiFi-panel-300x189.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Press the <strong>Scan</strong> button to display any available networks. The center panel displays available networks. Choose the desired network from the <strong>Devices</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Click the “<strong>i</strong>” Information icon in the <strong>Devices</strong> list. The Security window opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="504" height="252" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi.png" alt="wifi" class="wp-image-158292" style="width:580px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi.png 504w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/wifi-300x150.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 504px) 100vw, 504px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The Security setting supports WPA2/WPA-PSK.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Enter the <strong>Password</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Join</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Hotspot settings</strong></h2>



<p>The Hotspot panel provides status information about clients connected through the hotspot.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring hotspot</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your WiFi settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Hotspot</strong> icon.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="171" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/HotSpot-icon.jpg" alt="hotspot icon" class="wp-image-158299" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/HotSpot-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/HotSpot-icon-300x89.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Hotspot</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong><strong>Hotspot</strong></strong> slider.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="612" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel.jpg" alt="hotspot panel" class="wp-image-158306" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-282x300.jpg 282w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-71x75.jpg 71w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To update the <strong>Password</strong>, edit the <strong>Password field</strong>.<br><br>The new password must be 8 characters. A system restart is necessary after changing the password.<br></li>



<li>The hotspot feature will enable a connected device to access the internet using one of the connected networks.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Hotspot access allows FTP file transfers. If higher bandwidth is required, refer to “Router configuration settings.”</p>
</blockquote>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Connected Clients</strong> panel displays a list of devices that are connected to hotspots.</li>



<li>To manually select the route taken (for example, a Hotel WiFi network), choose the path from the <strong>Connected Clients</strong> list. In the Bandwidth drop-down menu, choose 2.4G or 5G.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Modem configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The Modem panel provides modem configuration information. Many cellular data cards are automatically detected by the TVU MLink transmitter and will self-configure. If this is the case, no further action will be required. However, if a data card requires configuration, you can use the Modem panel to configure it.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> For information about RPS Link and MLink v7 Model TE5700 antenna configuration, refer to “Antenna configuration RPS Link and MLink v7 model TE5700.”</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To open the Modems panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Modem</strong> icon.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="455" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Config-Modem-icon-1024x455.jpg" alt="Config Modem icon" class="wp-image-158313" style="width:667px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Config-Modem-icon-1024x455.jpg 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Config-Modem-icon-300x133.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Config-Modem-icon-768x341.jpg 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Config-Modem-icon.jpg 1078w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1024px) 100vw, 1024px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Modems</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Continue to Configuring data cards.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Configuring data cards</strong></h2>



<p>There are two data card configuration methods, Auto and Manual.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Auto configuration</strong></h2>



<p>Data cards are “Auto” detected, and further configuration is not necessary.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="646" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel.jpg" alt="modems panel" class="wp-image-158320" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel-267x300.jpg 267w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<p>To confirm that the data cards are auto-detected:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Roaming</strong> slider is enabled by default.</li>



<li>The <strong>Auto</strong> Network registration radio mode button is selected.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Available Slots</strong> drop-down list to confirm the list of available slots.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Manual configuration</strong></h2>



<p>When using the Manual data card configuration method, you can scan the list of available carriers and select the ones you want to configure. You can also change the APN or other details as needed.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="759" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel-Manual.jpg" alt="modems panel Manual" class="wp-image-158327" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel-Manual.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/modems-panel-Manual-228x300.jpg 228w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<p>To “Manually” configure specific data cards:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Roaming</strong> slider is enabled by default.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Available Slots</strong> drop-down list to display a list of available slots for configuration.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>Manual</strong> Network registration mode radio button. The Carrier panel opens.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Scan</strong> button to refresh the <strong>Carrier</strong> list. Make a selection, then input the setting information provided by the carrier.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Router configuration settings</strong></h2>



<p>In its standard deployment, the MLink can use one of its connections to support a data connection. When featured and deployed in router mode, the MLink can fully aggregate bandwidth.<br>Note: Router mode cannot be deployed in conjunction with a VLAN deployment, which is discussed in the next section.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>VLAN Mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p>VLAN mode is used for hotspot pass-through, providing a single default connection.</p>



<p>The VLAN settings are accessed on the network page. When disabled, it will offer to switch to router mode. Once enabled, the receiver, receiver port, and switch mode (layer 2) options will be displayed.</p>



<p>If neither router or VLAN only features are applied, none of these will be displayed.</p>



<p>To configure the pass-through in VLAN mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>General</strong> drop-down menu and select <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="619" height="315" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu.jpg" alt="" class="wp-image-158264" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu.jpg 619w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 619px) 100vw, 619px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>LAN Settings</strong> panel will display.</li>



<li>The <strong>Router</strong> setting is set to <strong>Auto</strong> by default in the<strong> LAN settings</strong> panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="968" height="579" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1.jpg" alt="LAN settings" class="wp-image-158334" style="width:642px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1.jpg 968w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1-300x179.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1-768x459.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 968px) 100vw, 968px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>VLAN</strong> panel.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> When the Router mode feature is enabled, the Switch to Router mode button appears in the VLAN panel.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="308" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN.jpg" alt="general Network VLAN" class="wp-image-158341" style="width:649px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN-300x95.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-Network-VLAN-768x244.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<ol start="5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Move the <strong>VLAN slider</strong> to the right to enable VLAN.</li>



<li>Select a <strong>receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>server port</strong> of the receiver.</li>



<li>Enable <strong>Switch mode (layer 2)</strong> for a single LAN segment at both the MLink and Receiver locations. This is recommended for most users. If a separate LAN segment at each location is desired, leave this option disabled.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="324" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1.jpg" alt="General Network VLAN 1" class="wp-image-158348" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-VLAN-1-300x145.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Router mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p>The TVU router has two pass-through data modes, VLAN and TVU Router mode. In VLAN mode, the MLink TE5700 can be used as an internet hotspot using one of the data connections. In the advanced TVU Router mode, the MLink TE5700 can utilize and make available the full aggregate bandwidth of the system for pass-through traffic. As a result, the bandwidth can often exceed 200 Mbps.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> TVU Router is an advanced licensed feature that must be activated by TVU Support before it can be used.</p>
</blockquote>



<p><strong>Router</strong> can be selected in the top menu when <strong>Router mode</strong> is enabled.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="971" height="287" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu.jpg" alt="Router menu" class="wp-image-158355" style="width:664px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu.jpg 971w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu-300x89.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Router-menu-768x227.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 971px) 100vw, 971px" /></figure>



<p>To configure Router mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click <strong>Router</strong> in the top menu.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Switch to Router mode</strong> button, then click <strong>Yes</strong> in the pop-up message box.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="404" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button.jpg" alt="switch to Router mode button" class="wp-image-158362" style="width:674px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button-300x125.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/switch-to-Router-mode-button-768x320.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Router configuration panel opens. The <strong>Router slider</strong> is enabled by default.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Router Server</strong> drop-down menu and select your region.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Ethernet Host</strong> checkbox to enable services for up to 10 attached devices.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Users can switch to VLAN mode by clicking the <strong>Switch to VLAN mode</strong> button.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="653" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-1024x653.png" alt="Router mode panel" class="wp-image-158369" style="width:591px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-1024x653.png 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-300x191.png 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router-768x490.png 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/router.png 1035w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1024px) 100vw, 1024px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>TVU Router feature (Client connections)</strong></h2>



<p>If higher bandwidth is required when using a hotspot, the optional TVU Router feature can be enabled to allow clients connected to the MLink speeds of up to 200 Mbps.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong> tab and expand the LAN Settings panel.</li>



<li>Select <strong>Auto</strong> in the Router drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>IP address</strong> and <strong>Subnet Mask</strong>, then click<strong> Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="968" height="579" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1.jpg" alt="" class="wp-image-158334" style="width:584px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1.jpg 968w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1-300x179.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/LAN-settings-1-768x459.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 968px) 100vw, 968px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down on the <strong>Hotspot</strong> panel. Connected Clients will display in the <strong>Connected Clients</strong> device list.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="612" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-1.jpg" alt="Hotspot panel" class="wp-image-158376" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-1.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-1-282x300.jpg 282w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Hotspot-panel-1-71x75.jpg 71w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Ethernet configuration DHCP IP</strong></h2>



<p>Ethernet settings are configured from the Receiver Control Config page.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The DHCP IP method, the address is automatically generated and cannot be manually entered.</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To configure your DHCP IP Ethernet settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Ethernet </strong>icon.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="169" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon.jpg" alt="Ethernet icon" class="wp-image-158383" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-icon-300x88.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Scroll down to the <strong>Ethernet</strong> panel.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Configure IPv4</strong> drop-down menu and select the<strong> DHCP IP</strong> method.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Slot ID</strong> drop-down menu and select a slot number.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Ethernet configuration Static IP</strong></h2>



<p>To configure your Ethernet settings for a Static IP address:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Configure IPv4</strong> drop-down menu and select the <strong>Static IP</strong> method.</li>



<li>Select the <strong>Slot ID</strong> number from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter a <strong>Static IP address</strong> in the <strong>IP Address</strong> field.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Subnet Mask</strong> in the <strong>Mask</strong> field.</li>



<li>Enter the <strong>Gateway</strong> in the <strong>Gateway</strong> field.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="342" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-panel-static-ip.jpg" alt="Ethernet panel static ip" class="wp-image-158398" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-panel-static-ip.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Ethernet-panel-static-ip-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Antenna configuration: RPS Link and MLink v7 model TE5700</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a757ccae-5fe2-44b0-9a74-be7a29827bf2"><strong>Antenna configuration RPS Link and</strong> <strong>MLink v7 model TE5700</strong></h2>



<p id="block-451c2118-121b-4536-af02-e4af7bd4e731">This section provides antenna configuration procedures for the RPS Link, MLink v7, and Rack Router v2 (Models RE975/980/990)</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8ba8f2bf-1593-4c51-9498-de360d8b8bae"><strong>RPS Link and MLink v7</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6895b12c-1cfa-4507-88a8-33423e352b47">To configure antennas for the RPS Link and MLink model TE5700 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol id="block-412c07f8-ff8f-4613-839d-946bdeea9266" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8fc8ad01-4355-4b1e-bf9d-835d8bf09c8f"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png" alt="ANT 0 antenna configuration" class="wp-image-95518" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" id="block-9e34766f-f56b-4130-af90-26882a437815" class="wp-block-list">
<li>For RPS Link and MLinkV7 (TE5700) unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-fafca7b4-dfd9-4f78-9d35-f10814825bf0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="2x 5G modem and 4x 4G LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95504" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<p id="block-47854015-af18-41d8-be7c-e840e363f0d4">Notes:</p>



<ul id="block-64c625bd-3c38-4791-9de8-5bd5c1a3bdbb" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The 5G antenna is compatible with 5G modems and 4G/LTE modems, whereas the 4G/LTE antenna can only be used with 4G/LTE modems but not 5G modems.</li>



<li>In addition, by connecting a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 0 port for a 4G/LTE modem, the user has the option to connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 1 port for a 4G/LTE modem. Meaning both ANT 0 and ANT 1 ports can be used for the antenna connection. However, connecting the ANT 1 port on both RPS Link and MlinkV7 (TE5700) product lineup is optional and not mandatory.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-67b2fe08-bb4a-461f-aed8-b189d38342b6"><strong>Rack Router v2 (RE975/980/990)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-cf44781d-b314-4338-a3ab-e2e7c1748520">To configure the Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE975 unit, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol id="block-0823d8b8-f10a-4866-8ed7-0883b423f14e" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, and ANT 1 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8d208f97-fee2-43a6-be63-21feb4cf8175"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95665" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" id="block-cf224ac7-acc3-459d-9582-ecd5ee13a2ef" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To configure a Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE980 unit, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-64267436-18e0-4273-bed1-0cd8d113be34"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95672" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" id="block-7c1ba589-63f7-44e1-9cda-414f1a9978f1" class="wp-block-list">
<li>For a Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 5G modem configuration, also known as RE990, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-5e15dc31-fcfe-43b7-8b9e-c98065f4b5f0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95679" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced transmitter operations &#8211; Web interface controls</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-fd44bf6c-b9a4-465f-a972-74d22059c3b7"><strong>Advanced transmitter operations</strong> &#8211;<strong> Web interface controls</strong></h2>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ee3b4217-0ba3-4093-a150-8162c6c2fb0a"><strong>Advanced operations using an iPhone, smart device or laptop</strong></h2>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> There are two methods you can use to access the Mlink Advanced operations menu selections. The instructions in this chapter will show laptop display examples.</p>
</blockquote>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Method 1</strong></h3>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar icon</strong> to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Advanced operations are categorized in four drop-down menus: <strong>Live</strong>, <strong>File</strong>, <strong>General</strong>, and <strong>Advanced</strong>. The following sections will address all four menus.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="268" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="MLink Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158412" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-menu-300x209.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Method 2</strong></h3>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using a laptop:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Advanced operations are categorized in four drop-down menus. They are located at the top right of the system status screen: <strong>Live</strong>, <strong>File</strong>, <strong>General</strong>, and <strong>Advanced</strong>. The following topics will address all four menus.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="525" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-transmitter-config-screen-1024x525.jpg" alt="MLink transmitter config screen" class="wp-image-158419" style="width:604px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-transmitter-config-screen-1024x525.jpg 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-transmitter-config-screen-300x154.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-transmitter-config-screen-768x394.jpg 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-transmitter-config-screen.jpg 1077w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1024px) 100vw, 1024px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu operations</strong></h2>



<p id="block-bd3db4c4-7063-4b5a-b5db-c58530f42901">The <strong>Live</strong> menu operations include the following settings:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Encoder</li>



<li>Receiver</li>



<li>Return Video</li>



<li>IP Source</li>



<li>VoIP/IFB</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b9f40106-8e7b-4075-aea5-cc08ca86e2cc"><strong>Live &#8211; Encoder</strong></h2>



<p id="block-5c908f15-58e8-4bc6-ad62-ef16399d01d5">Use the Encoder panel to configure video, audio encoding, and audio output mapping.</p>



<p>To access the Encoder panel:</p>



<ol id="block-5f80d0c9-2bc3-4ce4-99f8-38a213963ed7" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the<strong> Live</strong> menu, then tap <strong>Encoder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="616" height="323" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-158426" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg 616w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 616px) 100vw, 616px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Encoder status and controls</strong></h2>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> If the optional HEVC license is purchased, both H.265 Interview and H.265 Fast Motion mode will be available as selections.</p>
</blockquote>



<p>To configure Live video and audio encoding settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Select a <strong>Video Encoding</strong> mode that suites your application based on the following criteria:</li>
</ol>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>The encoding mode default is <strong>H.264</strong>.</li>



<li>If the optional HEVC license is purchased, both <strong>H.265 Interview</strong> and <strong>H.265 Fast Motion</strong> encoding modes will be available as selections.</li>



<li>Select the<strong> H.265 Interview</strong> radio button for shots containing limited motion, such as stand-ups or fixed shot interviews.</li>



<li>Use the <strong>H.265 Fast Motion</strong> radio button to optimize compression for video containing significant motion elements, such as sports video containing high motion or fast pans and zooms.</li>
</ul>



<ol start="2" id="block-33f6af95-0b75-4302-87b6-757e7a1da8ff" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Select your <strong>Audio Encode</strong> panel configurations.</li>



<li>Select an <strong>Audio output mapping</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="527" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-encoder-panel.jpg" alt="Live encoder panel" class="wp-image-158433" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-encoder-panel.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-encoder-panel-300x274.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; Receiver</strong></h2>



<p>Use the Receiver panel to configure your receivers. The Receiver panel displays the receiver status and controls.</p>



<p>To access the Receiver panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, then <strong>Receiver</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="616" height="323" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-158426" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg 616w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 616px) 100vw, 616px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Receiver</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="968" height="821" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel.jpg" alt="Live receiver panel" class="wp-image-158440" style="width:630px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel.jpg 968w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-300x254.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-768x651.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 968px) 100vw, 968px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Receiver status and controls</strong></h2>



<p>To select an alternate receiver, view its status, and set up and control a ”Live” transmission:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>To view and select a different receiver, click the Receiver <strong>Select R</strong> drop-down menu and select a receiver from the list.</li>



<li>Enable the<strong> Solo</strong> slider if you want a specific MLink to only display ‘Online” on the receiver you selected from the Receiver <strong>Select R</strong> drop-down menu.</li>



<li>In the <strong>Delay</strong> field, enter the desired transmission delay.</li>



<li>In the <strong>Bitrate (kbps)</strong> field, enter the desired transmission bitrate.</li>



<li>To enable the <strong>Low Bitrate Warning</strong>, enable the slider and enter a <strong>Low Bitrate</strong> <strong>Threshold</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="937" height="301" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-low-bitrate.jpg" alt="live receiver panel mode low bitrate" class="wp-image-158447" style="width:580px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-low-bitrate.jpg 937w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-low-bitrate-300x96.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-low-bitrate-768x247.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 937px) 100vw, 937px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Mode</strong> drop-down menu and select a mode that suits your application:</li>
</ol>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Interview</li>



<li>Normal</li>



<li>FastMoving</li>



<li>SD</li>



<li>Tapefeed</li>



<li>Custom</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="204" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-menu.jpg" alt="live receiver panel mode menu" class="wp-image-158454" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-menu.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-receiver-panel-mode-menu-300x106.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol start="7" id="block-0b958974-d3dd-4e5c-a688-4f8a59adbdfc" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your changes.</li>



<li>To <strong>Start</strong> or <strong>Stop</strong> the live transmission, click the<strong> Live</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; Return Video</strong></h2>



<p>The built-in HDMI output uses 720p by default, but can provide up to 1080p resolution and allows a user to send a confidence monitor or SDI source back to crews in the field. This on-board feature can now support viewing the return video feed using an iPhone and iPad. Contact TVU Support for 1080p configuration.</p>



<p>To access the Return Video panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, then <strong>Return Video</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="616" height="323" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-158426" style="width:573px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg 616w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 616px) 100vw, 616px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Return Video</strong> panel opens. There are three RVF From selections: <strong>Receiver</strong>, <strong>Producer</strong>, and <strong>Partyline</strong>.</li>



<li>Select where you want the RVF to come from. If you choose <strong>Receiver</strong>, select a <strong>Receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Select where your source is coming <strong>from</strong>.</li>



<li>Select where you want your <strong>Output to</strong> go and click <strong>Start</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="298" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-receiver.jpg" alt="live return video receiver" class="wp-image-158461" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-receiver.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-receiver-300x155.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>RVF from Producer selection:</strong></h3>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="292" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-producer.jpg" alt="live return video producer" class="wp-image-158468" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-producer.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-producer-300x152.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h3 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>RVF from Partyline selection:</strong></h3>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="295" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-partyline.jpg" alt="live return video partyline" class="wp-image-158475" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-partyline.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-return-video-partyline-300x154.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; IP Source</strong></h2>



<p>The IP Source panel allows users to select an outside IP source or camera source from the selection window with which to go live.</p>



<p>To access the IP Source panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, then<strong> IP Source</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="616" height="323" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-158426" style="width:603px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg 616w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 616px) 100vw, 616px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>IP Source</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>SDI</strong> or <strong>IP Source</strong> radio button.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>SDI</strong> radio button to display the camera source that is connected to the MLink.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="341" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source-sdi.jpg" alt="live ip source sdi" class="wp-image-158482" style="width:607px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source-sdi.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source-sdi-300x105.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source-sdi-768x270.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<ol start="5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>IP Source</strong> radio button to add an IP Source with which to go live.</li>



<li>Enter the valid<strong> IP address</strong> in the field under an available source selection with which you want to go live, then click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your source selection.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Home</strong> button to send all IP sources in one matrix picture to the TVU MLink.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="490" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source.jpg" alt="live ip source" class="wp-image-158489" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-ip-source-300x255.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live &#8211; VoIP/IFB</strong></h2>



<p>The VoIP/IFB panel enables you to:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Integrate VoIP/IFB audio in/out and from/to the transceiver.</li>



<li>Integrate IFB audio from the transceiver to the MLink.</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Live</strong> menu, then <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="616" height="323" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg" alt="Live menu" class="wp-image-158426" style="width:583px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu.jpg 616w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Live-menu-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 616px) 100vw, 616px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>VoIP/IFB</strong> panel opens. <strong>VoIP(Auto)</strong> is the default.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="265" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-voip.jpg" alt="live voip" class="wp-image-158496" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-voip.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/live-voip-300x138.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu &gt; VoIP/IFB panel &#8211; VoIP(RTC)</strong></h5>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="345" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel-1.jpg" alt="IFB Voip panel" class="wp-image-158503" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel-1.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/IFB-Voip-panel-1-300x180.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Live menu &gt; VoIP/IFB panel &#8211; IFB</strong></h5>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Make the appropriate selections.</li>



<li>Select an <strong>Embedded Audio</strong> if applicable.</li>



<li>Enable <strong>Bluetooth</strong> if applicable.</li>



<li>Adjust the <strong>Audio level</strong> slider if applicable.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The File menu is located at the top right of the system status screen.</p>



<p>The File menu operations include:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>File Uploader</li>



<li>Sync Folder</li>



<li>Recorder</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the Advanced operations menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens. Tap <strong>File</strong> &gt; <strong>File Uploader</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; File Uploader</strong></h2>



<p>The File Uploader panel allows you to upload files to a specified receiver using the Auto Sync feature.</p>



<p>The Auto Sync feature lets you to transmit wireless digital content from the MLink to the TVU receiver using a USB memory stick.</p>



<p>The MLink will auto-detect the memory stick and automatically transfer the contents to its internal SSD hard drive. The content will then be available for wireless transmission to the TVU receiver.</p>



<p>To access the File Uploader panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, then <strong>File Uploader</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="623" height="324" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-158510" style="width:486px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg 623w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu-300x156.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 623px) 100vw, 623px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>File Uploader</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>From</strong>.</li>



<li>Choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>To</strong>.</li>



<li>Tap the<strong> Upload</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="506" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-file-uploader-panel.jpg" alt="File uploader panel" class="wp-image-158517" style="width:624px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-file-uploader-panel.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-file-uploader-panel-300x226.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>If you select the <strong>Customize</strong> radio button, choose where you want your file uploaded <strong>From</strong>.</li>



<li>Tap the <strong>Upload</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>For more information, refer to the “File-Based Workflows Reference” document&#8217;s topic “Using the Auto Sync feature with a USB stick.”</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="970" height="578" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-uploader-customizable.jpg" alt="file uploader customizable" class="wp-image-158524" style="width:632px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-uploader-customizable.jpg 970w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-uploader-customizable-300x179.jpg 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-uploader-customizable-768x458.jpg 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 970px) 100vw, 970px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; Sync Folder</strong></h2>



<p>The Sync Folder panel enables users to transfer and sync files to a specified receiver and monitor the progress.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Sync Folder</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, then <strong>Sync Folder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="623" height="324" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-158510" style="width:574px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg 623w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu-300x156.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 623px) 100vw, 623px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Sync Folder</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Select a <strong>receiver</strong> to sync your files to. The default is the last receiver you went live with.</li>



<li>Enable the <strong>Set as Default</strong> slider to set a specific receiver as your default.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>For more information, refer to the “File-Based Workflows Reference” document&#8217;s topic “Auto Sync feature.”</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="339" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-sync-folder.jpg" alt="file sync folder panel" class="wp-image-158531" style="width:599px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-sync-folder.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-sync-folder-300x151.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>File &#8211; Recorder</strong></h2>



<p>The Recorder tab allows users to select, mark, download, rename, and upload recorded files.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Recorder</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>File</strong> menu, then <strong>Recorder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="623" height="324" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg" alt="File menu" class="wp-image-158510" style="width:533px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu.jpg 623w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/File-menu-300x156.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 623px) 100vw, 623px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Recorder</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the File-based Workflow Reference guide “Working with recorded content” topic for detailed information about how to use the Record feature.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="856" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-recorder-panel.jpg" alt="file recorder panel" class="wp-image-158538" style="width:616px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-recorder-panel.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/file-recorder-panel-236x300.jpg 236w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The General operations menu include:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Network</li>



<li>Firmware Upgrade</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Advanced operations</strong> menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens. Tap <strong>General</strong> &gt; <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General &#8211; Network</strong></h2>



<p>The <strong>Network </strong>panel enables users to:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Configure LAN settings</li>



<li>Users can complete the Hotspot configuration for client connections in the Hotspot panel.</li>



<li>Create additional WiFi connections with additional USB WiFi adapter support. Users can enable or disable WiFi from the UI. The WiFi will automatically redial if network connectivity fails.</li>



<li>Configure Ethernet</li>



<li>Configure Modems</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Network</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> menu, then <strong>Network</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="619" height="315" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-158545" style="width:498px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1.jpg 619w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 619px) 100vw, 619px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Network</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="535" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1.jpg" alt="General Network panel" class="wp-image-158552" style="width:602px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-1-300x239.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Router</strong> drop-down menu and make a selection. <strong>Auto</strong> is the default.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="473" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-LAN-settings-router-menu.jpg" alt="General Network LAN settings router menu" class="wp-image-158559" style="width:607px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-LAN-settings-router-menu.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-Network-LAN-settings-router-menu-300x211.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The Network configuration information is explained in “Network configuration.”</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>General &#8211; Firmware Upgrade</strong></h2>



<p>You can check for firmware updates in the <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>General</strong> menu, then <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="619" height="315" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1.jpg" alt="General menu" class="wp-image-158545" style="width:505px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1.jpg 619w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/General-menu-1-300x153.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 619px) 100vw, 619px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Firmware Upgrade</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>The following message displays when a firmware update is not available.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="300" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-firmware-updates-panel.jpg" alt="firmware upgrade panel" class="wp-image-158566" style="width:521px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-firmware-updates-panel.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/general-firmware-updates-panel-300x134.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>When a new Firmware version is available, you will have the option to upgrade from this panel.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced menu operations</strong></h2>



<p>The Advanced menu include:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>Progressive Download</li>



<li>SelfCheck</li>



<li>NTP</li>



<li>MediaMind Story</li>



<li>MediaMind Setting</li>



<li>Messages</li>



<li>Token</li>
</ul>



<p>To access the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu using an iPhone or smart device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Tap the <strong>three-bar</strong> icon to open the Advanced operations panel.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="384" height="151" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg" alt="MLink advanced icon" class="wp-image-158405" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon.jpg 384w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-Advanced-icon-300x118.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 384px) 100vw, 384px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The Advanced operations panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Progressive Download</strong></h2>



<p>The Progressive Download feature is enabled in the Progressive Download panel and is controlled by using the record button on the video camera (e.g. Camcorder).</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Progressive Download</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>Progressive Download</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:520px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Progressive Download</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="325" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-progressive-dwnld.jpg" alt="progressive download panel" class="wp-image-158580" style="width:656px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-progressive-dwnld.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-progressive-dwnld-300x145.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>To use the Progressive Download feature, Move the <strong>Enable</strong> slider to the right until green.</li>



<li>The receiver is specified in the <strong>File</strong> menu &gt; <strong>Sync folder</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; SelfCheck</strong></h2>



<p>The Self Check panel enables you to perform a self check on your devices’ basic, video, and network health status.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>SelfCheck</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>SelfCheck</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:520px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>SelfCheck</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Click one or all <strong>Basic</strong>, <strong>Video</strong>, and <strong>Network</strong> checkboxes, then the <strong>Start self-check</strong> button to run a health check on your device.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="351" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check.jpg" alt="SelfCheck panel" class="wp-image-158587" style="width:536px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-300x157.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="4" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click <strong>Skip</strong> or <strong>Yes</strong> to the following prompt.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="657" height="293" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-2.jpg" alt="Self check prompt 1" class="wp-image-158594" style="width:537px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-2.jpg 657w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-2-300x134.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 657px) 100vw, 657px" /></figure>



<ol start="5" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click <strong>No</strong> or <strong>Yes</strong> to the following prompt.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="717" height="331" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-3.jpg" alt="SelfCheck prompt 2" class="wp-image-158601" style="width:528px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-3.jpg 717w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-3-300x138.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 717px) 100vw, 717px" /></figure>



<ol start="6" class="wp-block-list">
<li>Progress will be displayed during the self check process.</li>



<li>After the SelfCheck completes, a <strong>Report</strong> is generated and will display in the SelfCheck panel.</li>



<li>Any issues display in red. After mitigating flagged issues, you can click the <strong>Self-check again</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="738" height="1024" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-report-738x1024.jpg" alt="advanced self check report" class="wp-image-158608" style="width:543px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-report-738x1024.jpg 738w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-report-216x300.jpg 216w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-report-768x1065.jpg 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-self-check-report.jpg 969w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 738px) 100vw, 738px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; NTP</strong></h2>



<p>The NTP panel enables users to lock and synchronize a NTP host IP to the domain controller.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>NTP</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>NTP</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:521px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>NTP</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>The Lock to <strong>Auto (Default)</strong> selection will lock to the closest available Host IP.</li>



<li>The NTP Host IP should display “<strong>Synchronized</strong>” in green.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="307" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-NTP.jpg" alt="NTP panel" class="wp-image-158615" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-NTP.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-NTP-300x137.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; MediaMind Story</strong></h2>



<p>The MediaMind Story panel allows you to add a Story name to a progressive download file.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>MediaMind Story</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>MediaMind Story</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:555px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>MediaMind Story</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Enter a<strong> Story Name</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Tag</strong> to include the <strong>Story Name</strong> in the Progressive Download file name.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="399" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMstory.jpg" alt="MediaMind Story panel" class="wp-image-158622" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMstory.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMstory-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; MediaMind Setting</strong></h2>



<p>The MediaMind Setting panel enables you to configure live settings for face, speech, and speaker recognition up to four languages when you are using the TVU MediaMind Appliance (MMA) service.</p>



<p>Whether it is a live stream, an IP video stream, or a video file, the TVU MediaMind Appliance (MMA) uses AI technology to automatically generate metadata, organize, and search for content.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:519px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>MediaMind Setting</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Configure your live settings for MMA and click <strong>Save</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="463" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMSetting.jpg" alt="MediaMind Setting panel" class="wp-image-158629" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMSetting.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-MMSetting-300x207.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Messages</strong></h2>



<p>The Messages panel enables you to send and receive messages between the MLink and transceivers.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Messages</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>Messages</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:531px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Messages</strong> panel opens.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="672" height="395" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-messages.jpg" alt="Messages panel" class="wp-image-158636" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-messages.jpg 672w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-messages-300x176.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 672px) 100vw, 672px" /></figure>



<ol start="3" class="wp-block-list">
<li>In the <strong>To</strong> field, enter the recipient’s TVU receivers’ <strong>PID</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter your message in the <strong>Message</strong> field and tap the <strong>Send</strong> button.</li>



<li>Expand the <strong>Received Message</strong> caret to view messages that were received by the MLink.</li>



<li>Expand the<strong> Sent Message</strong> caret to view messages that were sent by the MLink.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading"><strong>Advanced &#8211; Token</strong></h2>



<p>The Token panel allows you to create and configure tokens. Tokens are used to allow a recipient temporary access to your device.</p>



<p>To access the <strong>Token</strong> panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list">
<li>Click the <strong>Advanced</strong> menu, then <strong>Token</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="633" height="375" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg" alt="Advanced menu" class="wp-image-158573" style="width:535px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu.jpg 633w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/Advanced-menu-300x178.jpg 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 633px) 100vw, 633px" /></figure>



<ol start="2" class="wp-block-list">
<li>The <strong>Token</strong> panel opens.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Create Token</strong>.</li>



<li>Enter the device <strong>PID</strong>. The device name automatically populates.</li>



<li>Enter the recipient’s <strong>email address</strong>.</li>



<li>Set up a <strong>Valid Time</strong> range: (<strong>D</strong>) Days, (<strong>H</strong>) Hours, (<strong>M</strong>) Minutes, and (<strong>S</strong>) Seconds for the token to be active.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Create Token</strong>.</li>



<li>To <strong>Reset</strong> the <strong>Password</strong>, enter and confirm the new password and click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>



<li>To <strong>Reset</strong> the <strong>Valid Time</strong>, select the <strong>receiver</strong> from the drop-down menu, set the <strong>Valid time</strong>, then click <strong>Apply</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="940" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-Token.jpg" alt="Token panel" class="wp-image-158643" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-Token.jpg 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/advanced-Token-184x300.jpg 184w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<p id="block-10fdae2b-4209-470d-ba55-0d2d3a253774"></p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-4004cdc3-5238-4a23-af11-2201e0b7424c"><strong>Product Specifications:</strong></h2>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-472614b5-e4b4-4582-a8ce-2ddc21ba55a5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="566" height="632" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec.jpg" alt="MLink TE5500 prod spec" class="wp-image-158208" style="aspect-ratio:0.9121951219512195;width:811px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec.jpg 566w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5500-prod-spec-269x300.jpg 269w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 566px) 100vw, 566px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e85ddcaf-4495-491b-88f7-4a512f6759aa"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="568" height="698" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5700-prod-spec.jpg" alt="MLink TE5700 prod spec" class="wp-image-158201" style="aspect-ratio:0.8037518037518038;width:817px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5700-prod-spec.jpg 568w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2025/08/MLink-TE5700-prod-spec-244x300.jpg 244w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 568px) 100vw, 568px" /></figure>



<p></p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p>© Copyright 2025 TVU Networks Corporation. All rights reserved in all media.<br>Document Part Number: TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 QSUG Rev E EN 07-2025</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide-v7-4/">TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide v7.4</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
		<item>
		<title>TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide</title>
		<link>https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide/</link>
		
		<dc:creator><![CDATA[Cynthia]]></dc:creator>
		<pubDate>Wed, 27 Mar 2024 19:59:51 +0000</pubDate>
				<guid isPermaLink="false">https://editwww.tvunetworks.com/?post_type=tips&#038;p=114083</guid>

					<description><![CDATA[<p>This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models.</p>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide/">TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></description>
										<content:encoded><![CDATA[
<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-227fc3b4-c9e5-4ed2-af1e-45f928f47159"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="1024" height="579" src="https://editwww.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-1024x579-min-2.png" alt="" class="wp-image-114173" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-1024x579-min-2.png 1024w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-1024x579-min-2-300x170.png 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/06/Featured-Image-Template-Posts-TVU-MLink-1024x579-min-2-768x434.png 768w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 1024px) 100vw, 1024px" /></figure>



<p id="block-6d1b45f9-aac7-47ac-9913-c1122b83b354">TVU MLink is the complete and versatile rack-mount IP video solution designed specifically for use in vans, trucks, sport utility vehicles, and in fixed studios. MLink uses all cellular 3G/4G/LTE/5G, satellite, microwave, WiFi, and Ethernet connections to transmit a high-quality and reliable video stream in HD with sub-second latency. A stream can be started with any type of connection, with additional ones added or removed at any time without video disruption.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Introduction, setup, and base operation</div>


<h1 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-045c245e-a8b9-47cd-85e6-565850402244"><strong>Chapter 1 &#8211; Introduction, setup, and base operation</strong></h1>



<p id="block-16f0602a-c8d1-4ffb-b4f3-592f4336d896">The TVU MLink features Inverse StatMux Plus (IS+) technology for dependable video broadcast in even the most challenging transmission environments, such as a moving vehicle. TVU MLink uses IP67-rated external roof-mounted antennas to ensure the best possible signal strength.</p>



<p id="block-1818b527-f7ec-433f-954e-e688575aa0d3">The TVU MLink transmitter also features the new TVU 7 platform, which supports the TVU Partyline feature.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-19ab3f8a-f475-403d-bb36-fe3e147acb86"><strong>TVU MLink overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-1d024a38-2317-4f13-981f-c914e2d0232d">TVU MLink models TE5500 and TE5700 are a part of the TVU ecosystem. The video streams from MLink can also be easily distributed to multiple locations using TVU Grid® for live video switching, routing, and distribution solutions.</p>



<p id="block-a8926293-24ad-4e92-81ed-2623feab10a7">The TVU MLink TE5500 transmitter (encoder) uses the TVU Command Center Web interface, which provides a cloud-based centralized management and control solution for all TVU devices and services. For detailed information about TVU Command Center, refer to the “TVU Command Center Setup and User Guide.“</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image" id="block-aff6a404-0af6-4b61-ace9-c2e53397bfb6"><img decoding="async" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/08/command-center-3-1024x623.png" alt="This image has an empty alt attribute; its file name is command-center-3-1024x623.png"/></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	</div>

<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Features overview</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-31f0298a-b322-417a-8a56-dba858e31ffe"><strong>Features overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-aeb3a23a-94e3-47e1-ab09-72fe08a7e603"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5500 contribution encoder:</strong></p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-3765adad-080e-4240-a0b3-7f8776b84e47">
<li>MLink TE5500 is an IS+ transmitter in a 1RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats 4K 25/30P, 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Ultra-low latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 SDI-embedded audio channels or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Single Ethernet port for commodity internet connectivity.</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Status monitor output via DP or HDMI.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8 Mbps CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (Package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Supports HTTP, UDP, RTMP, and RTMPS protocols.</li>



<li>Directly compatible with TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU Channel, and TVU CloudR.</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-8ff9b288-013e-49bc-b60f-81fed6d3dcea"><strong>TVU MLink Model TE5700 &#8211; IS+ field / Remote uplink:</strong></p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-d21ce1f3-eb64-4c42-a77a-3effbed917cc">
<li>The MLink TE5700 is an IS+ transmitter in a 2RU rack-mount form factor.</li>



<li>Aggregates any mix of cellular, Ethernet, WiFi, satellite, and microwave.</li>



<li>Supports up to 6 embedded LTE or 5G modems. Ships standard with external IP67 rated external LTE antennas (3m cables) or optional 5G antennas.</li>



<li>Has the ability to support a mix of 5G (optional) /LTE/4G and 3G modems (internal to the chassis) with external SMA antenna connections (4x SMA per 5G Modem, 2x SMA per LTE modem). The MLink TE5700 allows modem antennas to connect directly to the chassis, simplifying cabling.</li>



<li>Auto-senses and supports virtually all video formats, including 4K (25/30P), 1080p, 1080i, 720p, NTSC/PAL transmission using HEVC or H.264 VBR or CBR encoding (300K-50Mb/s).</li>



<li>Connect to virtually any live professional/consumer video device via 6G-SDI or HDMI 2.0a input, including cameras, video routers, pool feeds, video switchers, video players, and more.</li>



<li>Super low-latency transmission over commodity internet. Glass-to-glass latency as low as 500ms over cellular / 350ms over Ethernet.</li>



<li>Supports up to 16 channels of SDI-embedded audio or 8 channels of HDMI-embedded audio.</li>



<li>Dual encoder support (package dependent); one is dedicated for live transmission, and the other automatically records in a 7.5 hour, 8Mb/s CBR loop anytime an input is connected (whether you are live or not). Access recordings locally or via the TVU Transceiver back at the studio.</li>



<li>File upload management; Upload files from the field using a connected USB device (thumb drive or HDD/SSD) with file management capability (package dependent).</li>



<li>Web-based ConfigT interface for local or remote monitoring and control. Supports up to 6 IP source inputs.</li>



<li>Easily accessible front panel SIM card slots for easy configuration.</li>



<li>Front panel LCD interface for easy configuration, control, and monitoring.</li>



<li>Embedded outbound WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for use with IS+ transmissions.</li>



<li>Embedded HotSpot WiFi module with external antenna support (MIMO) for access point use (Internet connectivity).</li>



<li>Support for TVU Return Video Feed via rear-panel HDMI port.</li>



<li>Talkback support uses TVU Voice (2-way voice) or traditional IFB (package dependent).</li>



<li>Supported as a source when used with TVU Partyline for collaboration.</li>



<li>Optional TVU Router support (TVU model RE980 only) which turns MLink into a high-speed access point in virtually any location. All data connections are aggregated together to provide high-speed connectivity.</li>



<li>Optional dual power supply</li>



<li>Directly compatible with the TVU Cloud production tools, including TVU Command Center, TVU Producer, TVU Partyline, TVU CloudR, and TVU Channel.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-3db1face-0b93-48b2-8a2d-2139a32db887"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="476" height="452" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png" alt="ENG vehicle configuration example" class="wp-image-95581" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example.png 476w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ENG-vehicle-configuration-example-300x285.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 476px) 100vw, 476px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	About this guide</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-9aac6628-8ccf-4df0-9bfc-aac5cf04dbd8"><strong>About this guide</strong></h2>



<p id="block-73b73475-1841-4baf-8ddc-f00857636c36">This MLink User Guide provides specifications and instructions for setting up and operating two MLink Models, the TVU MLink Model TE5500 (for Ethernet applications) and the TVU MLink Model TE5700 transmitters.</p>



<p id="block-f0e5aada-3c50-4b35-8b60-1d103cd6a5d4">Main topics:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-2855e063-7cae-4fe0-bf76-5de665484dd5">
<li>Setting up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5700</li>



<li>Using the faceplate controls and operations panel</li>



<li>Configuring, monitoring, and controlling the TVU MLink transmitter using the Web UI</li>



<li>Operating the TVU MLink model TE5500 and model TE5700</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-cf23d1a6-8a14-435a-9bd0-30da9c802077"><strong>Model TE5500 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-41fae7e2-bc62-474c-9658-b3072d805fd6">The TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> USB ports on the front panel are intended to support only a keyboard and mouse. Do not connect USB modems, network adapters, and like devices into these ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-51eb4480-fbcc-4c9f-89cc-1d1587027e09"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="528" height="141" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 front panel" class="wp-image-95735" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel.png 528w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-front-panel-300x80.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 528px) 100vw, 528px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e1055d03-65f7-4aaa-ae14-59956fb1a7ca"><strong>Model TE5500 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-9b344a6b-c28b-4df5-864e-55fa037b397f">The TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel features the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The USB ports support up to four USB devices from any of the six ports.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7e07b14f-18c3-4f7a-95fc-50a68ddf29de"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="531" height="180" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5500 rear panel connections" class="wp-image-95742" style="aspect-ratio:2.95;width:688px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections.png 531w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5500-rear-panel-connections-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 531px) 100vw, 531px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5700 front and back panel overviews</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-63f82d77-36bf-4f9b-a0dc-fdd6a4ce7310"><strong>Model TE5700 front panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-4745b904-4279-4cb6-9de4-2bef02b0f53e">The TVU MLink model TE5700 front panel features the following connections, indicators, and controls. The TE5700 ships with 3 standard LTE dome antennas to support 6 modems.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7365d3c0-4b3d-4b8e-9faf-ed771c2a75d5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="512" height="177" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5700 front panel" class="wp-image-95749" style="aspect-ratio:2.8926553672316384;width:742px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel.png 512w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-front-panel-300x104.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 512px) 100vw, 512px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-774c131e-d5c6-490a-907b-a7c3288d4a23"><strong>Model TE5700 rear panel overview</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f79b08c4-6237-445a-a0f7-31dd381384c2">The TVU MLink model TE5700 and rear panel feature the following connections.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The top left USB port supports WiFi while the bottom right port supports hotspot functionality (for TE5700 support only)</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4803474f-7176-4e4f-ba4a-b18300a14db3"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="538" height="206" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink model TE5700 rear panel" class="wp-image-95756" style="aspect-ratio:2.6116504854368934;width:773px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel.png 538w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-model-TE5700-rear-panel-300x115.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 538px) 100vw, 538px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Before you begin</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f9c911de-af64-4ba3-ad48-c5ee57b4062d"><strong>Before you begin</strong></h2>



<p id="block-f996f828-633d-4b49-84ff-15af08fec6d8">Complete the following procedures to set up the TVU MLink model TE5500 and TE5700 transmitters.<br>Refer to the front and rear panel overviews for MLink transmitter connection descriptions and locations to assist with the setup procedures. Contact TVU Support if you have any difficulties during the setup process.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5500 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-727d10fd-c597-429a-9b2d-cf96f2f7fec7"><strong>MLink TE5500 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-04866067-8ee5-4e57-8903-5fe200b8ecdb">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5500 transmitter. All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-a6688ead-48c6-4771-abc3-1c9d0adf4b0b">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect a computer display connector to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the top left rear panel USB port to enable WiFi if required.</li>



<li>Connect a TP-Link wireless card dongle to the bottom right rear panel USB port to enable hotspot functionality if required.</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to the left Ethernet port on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="7" id="block-645bb35a-3fc3-4e3e-96ff-7d215516415f">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Model TE5700 setup</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-028c6532-4a3f-4468-83e8-969ed834d54b"><strong>MLink TE5700 transmitter setup procedure</strong></h2>



<p id="block-b71b061e-c3b1-4030-ab61-89272a6bd692">Complete the following steps to set up the MLink model TE5700 transmitter:</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> All input sources must be in a supported video format and frame rate.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-2705eff2-62d4-4a5f-adf5-bbc0e0110913">
<li>Connect the factory-supplied AC power cable to the MLink and AC power source.</li>



<li>Connect the computer display to the rear panel display or HDMI output port to view real-time system status.</li>



<li>If required, connect WiFi MIMO antennas to the top left WiFi connectors to support the MIMO mode configuration for LTE downloading (does not support uploading.)</li>



<li>Connect an Ethernet cable to one of the two GbE Ethernet ports on the rear panel.</li>



<li>Connect the antenna connector to the modem connection on the rear panel:</li>
</ol>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-ad52d0e1-b733-40cf-afb9-db43293aba90">
<li>LTE dome antenna (3 antennas) with two connectors. One antenna supports 2 modems and should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>



<li>5G modem antenna (one per modem) with four connectors. The 5G antenna should be installed at least 20 centimeters apart.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-9ef0e27e-29c2-4c84-aad7-1687ebf90691"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="763" height="484" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png" alt="WiFi MIMO antennas" class="wp-image-95497" style="aspect-ratio:1.5764462809917354;width:495px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas.png 763w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/WiFi-MIMO-antennas-300x190.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 763px) 100vw, 763px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5bb7d6fe-b593-4472-8f41-86ed39d1f4e5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="381" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png" alt="LTE dome antenna" class="wp-image-95623" style="aspect-ratio:1.6377952755905512;width:463px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LTE-dome-antenna-300x183.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4c384503-c628-40e0-9063-6cfbd85734c6"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="656" height="423" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png" alt="5G modem antenna" class="wp-image-95511" style="aspect-ratio:1.5508274231678487;width:468px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna.png 656w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/5G-modem-antenna-300x193.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 656px) 100vw, 656px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="6" id="block-b26aacbc-eaff-47ac-882d-1b034a503e07">
<li>Connect the HD/SD video source to the SDI or HDMI port on the back of the MLink. Refer to the rear panel overview diagram for the SDI input and HDMI input port locations.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Supports up to 8 channels of embedded audio.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="7" id="block-40118d21-0ab8-4396-a416-5c64bdb459b9">
<li>TVU IFB and VoIP service are provided using the USB audio box connected to the receiver. Connect your audio equipment as appropriate.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	MLink TE5700 front panel controls and operations</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-f34630c5-1e1f-42fc-9ce6-7396c3f93a12"><strong>MLink TE5700 front panel controls and operations</strong></h2>



<p id="block-af727db7-ccfb-4b6f-81cf-c6866731eab9">You will use the control panel buttons to access common functions on the device, such as switching receivers, transmitting modes, or triggering a live transmission.</p>



<p id="block-1199da4c-2dee-4cf9-9b00-cd4daea6fff8">The control panel button functions are as follows:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-a0131ccf-4a6b-4da5-ad5c-1b221342d614">
<li>Press the<strong> Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to switch between paired receivers or transceivers.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>green check button</strong> to go live or to confirm an action.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>Red X button</strong> to stop a live transmission or deny an action.</li>



<li>Use the <strong>Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrows</strong> to switch between preset transmission modes.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-41795cdd-4ae6-4c5d-9d7d-b94369c82d92"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="539" height="155" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png" alt=" Control panel buttons" class="wp-image-95539" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons.png 539w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Control-panel-buttons-300x86.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 539px) 100vw, 539px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5700 On and Off</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b72ebb1f-1314-4225-8eee-4adb02564570"><strong>Step 1 &#8211; Powering the TVU MLink TE5700 On and Off</strong></h2>



<p id="block-09ebd495-d9d2-4342-a911-53ea44204272">Complete the following steps to power on/off and restart the MLink transmitter:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-98812fa0-b63d-4fc5-b8d2-862811408755">
<li>To power On the TVU MLink, press the power button in the front panel&#8217;s left lower section.<br><br>The name and PID number of the unit displays on the MLink LCD screen during boot-up.</li>



<li>To power Off the TVU MLink, press and hold the power button down for more than four seconds.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The TVU MLink will automatically restart if the power button is pressed and held in for less than four seconds.</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c401d83b-fce7-4474-bc0a-b47e77a7ad85"><strong>TVU MLink TE5700 front LCD panel and functions</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ca76c0ae-9d76-417c-ab7f-8312d8300364">The MLink front LCD display panel allows the user to view the status of the following functions:</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-2cdef7f4-368b-4e01-bd0d-aac59557f512"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="338" height="156" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink front LCD panel" class="wp-image-95707" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel.png 338w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-front-LCD-panel-300x138.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 338px) 100vw, 338px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1624205c-0d2b-451d-96f7-b39188706975"><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong></h2>



<p id="block-811a979c-6beb-482d-a6ac-97055a3da2f9">The transmission status monitor displays the current transmission status of the paired TVU One, referred to as the “TVU Pack.”</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-2b31b680-e067-42a6-99eb-0fbfa0e55c51">
<li>If the display is flashing “LIVE,” it indicates the transmission is live.</li>



<li>If a camera or input source is not connected to the TVU MLink transmitter, the LCD panel displays “Online.”</li>



<li>If a video source is detected, but the session is not Live, the display will show “STDBY” to indicate it is in Standby mode.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-053a5c96-2265-4e27-9c10-43758524dca9"><strong>Receiver name</strong></h2>



<p id="block-104919fe-bc7e-4232-b5a7-833bb117f8b1">The currently selected receiver name is displayed on line 2.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-bd8294f3-4b0c-4d15-8504-f15296240397"><strong>Preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ef2503ec-be68-4119-a30d-2ddcafb8d76b">The transmission mode status for the selected receiver is displayed under the receiver name.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b6129e97-a166-475d-adbe-ed6de373c630"><strong>Input</strong></h2>



<p id="block-a1011731-4825-4d79-a904-7f5b641fb98f">The input source is displayed on line 4.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a0a5a91e-a4fe-4e78-b02a-25e0afb46b96"><strong>Using the TVU MLink controls and operations panel</strong></h2>



<p id="block-88725c0d-e21c-421f-87f4-9953a87fecd0">Complete the following procedures in steps 2 through 4 to use the TVU MLink front panel controls and operations functions. The MLink status displays on the LCD screen.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the following “LCD status display panel” figure unless otherwise indicated for this section.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-b85be09c-78ff-4779-9c51-6bd755e5759b"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="212" height="108" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/LCD-status-display-panel.png" alt="" class="wp-image-95616" style="aspect-ratio:1.962962962962963;width:448px;height:auto"/></figure>



<h5 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8182a10c-316f-4939-97d5-463498e00f0c">Figure reference: LCD status display panel</h5>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d9cc179-6deb-4aa2-99ad-8885682fcd6b"><strong>Step 2 &#8211; Choosing a transceiver</strong></h2>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-05c58cea-a05b-4290-86b9-829a18648759">
<li>Locate the currently selected transceiver’s name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 2 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel. Press the <strong>Left</strong> and <strong>Right arrows</strong> to scroll through and select the available receiver.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD panel.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-6a6ffade-d9af-4818-b6ab-478910b8dd97">The default preset transmission mode may be different for each receiver or transceiver. You may see the preset transmission mode change when switching between other receivers and transceivers.</p>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-5db3dcbb-7269-4f88-8cac-07e130a498bc"><strong>Step 3 &#8211; Choosing a preset transmission mode</strong></h2>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-96c971f3-869e-4ad4-8f36-db40f3457a71">
<li>Locate the preset transmission modes displayed under the receiver name. Refer to callout<strong> ( 3 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To choose a preset transmission mode, use the controls and operations panel<strong> Up</strong> and <strong>Down arrow keys</strong> to scroll through and select the desired option.</li>



<li>Verify your change on the LCD display panel.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1ed36f76-e25b-4073-9196-0ebc031c4783"><strong>Step 4 &#8211; Going live with your transmission</strong></h2>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-fbd091e2-c4d6-40a1-8d1f-59796c36cf6d">
<li>Before going “Live,” connect the camera or input source to the MLink transmitter. If a camera or input source is not connected, “Online” displays in the top left corner of the LCD panel.</li>



<li>Verify that the camera or input source is connected. The LCD panel displays “STDBY” in the top left corner of the LCD panel. Refer to callout<strong> ( 1 )</strong> on the MLink “LCD status display panel” figure.</li>



<li>To go “Live,” press the <strong>green check mark button</strong> on the front control panel. The transmitter will prompt you to start a live transmission in the LCD display.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e393ceb4-cb15-4de9-a5bd-a6bd85e744b5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="359" height="121" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png" alt="Go Live action display" class="wp-image-95602" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display.png 359w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-Live-action-display-300x101.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 359px) 100vw, 359px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="4" id="block-c081d575-7a67-499f-adfc-d96e45a39110">
<li>To confirm, click the<strong> green check mark button</strong> once more.</li>



<li>To deny the request, click the front panel controls <strong>red X button</strong>. The selected preset transmission mode and paired receiver name will display on the LCD panel.</li>



<li>When the transmitter is in “Live” mode, the word “LIVE” (as shown in the go-live confirmation display) blinks in the top left corner of the LCD panel. The variable bitrate will also display in real-time next to the flashing “LIVE” indicator.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-d72687bf-4727-492d-9445-49a8d20bd714"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="372" height="131" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png" alt="Live confirmation display" class="wp-image-95609" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation.png 372w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Go-live-cancellation-300x106.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 372px) 100vw, 372px" /></figure>



<p id="block-62acf93f-df1a-4113-9d5a-bcdc5a6ab448">The selected preset transmission mode, paired receiver name, and input source are displayed.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="7" id="block-21b72411-0130-4165-a9ca-31a06bb9b719">
<li>Press the <strong>red X button</strong> on the control panel to stop a live transmission. The unit will prompt you to stop the live transmission, as shown in the following figure.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-7c5c5a0f-6e0d-490d-baa2-eee6b8a61fde"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="366" height="125" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png" alt="Go live cancellation 2" class="wp-image-96642" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2.png 366w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/02/go-live-cancellation-2-300x102.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 366px) 100vw, 366px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="8" id="block-e85217b5-2d41-4952-8250-23fd16f89da0">
<li>To confirm that you want to stop the transmission, press the front panel&#8217;s controls&#8217; <strong>green check mark button</strong>. Then, click the <strong>red X button</strong> on the front panel controls to deny the request.</li>



<li>After the live transmission has stopped, the screen returns to (“STDBY”) mode.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Step 5 &#8211; Using the display or HDMI port</div>


<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ad48fefc-7c24-42c0-82c8-d00c0cceb21a"><strong>Step 5 &#8211; Use the Display or HDMI port to view the Video preview and transmission status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-fc580d6c-1b9f-4c55-ac24-14bca291ecf6">To view a detailed view of the status screen, complete the following steps to connect a monitor to the Display or HDMI port on the TVU MLink rear panel:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-b1224f7e-3bf6-46bb-81fb-05ed88238219">
<li>Connect a Display or HDMI monitor cable to the appropriate port on the TVU MLink to view the detailed status display screen.</li>



<li>Connect a camera to the TVU MLink and power on both the camera and MLink devices. The Video Preview Transmission screen displays.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-53a2e8e3-a716-4b42-8422-902585af82be"><strong>Video Preview Transmission screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-e4f0afda-fd2f-499b-ac08-d75df99cc82d">Refer to the following “Video preview transmission screen” figure and the live TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-3927a50f-ad5f-4aa1-9c46-abe85d33d77a"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="339" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen.png" alt="Video Preview Transmission screen" class="wp-image-95490" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Video-Preview-Transmission-screen-300x169.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<p id="block-9e975f9c-6871-4231-a895-2bea81985d3e">TVU MLink display status screen settings and descriptions:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-e9b13133-fea5-4d8d-9e49-5586cc6de8e5">
<li><strong>Input preview</strong> &#8211; Shows the live picture from the camera and captured in TVU MLink.</li>



<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the TVU Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator displays black/gray, the TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-63aad145-ac79-482e-a680-f05d8050f8a9">
<li>Data card status monitor:</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-a8d714ba-2126-4f24-8362-0bd30e2c2aff">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the Pack will appear as green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The green status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The red status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The black status indicates there is no card.</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-22675e3b-085f-49f8-8941-9a13d776674e">
<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number. Be sure to have this information available when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor</strong> &#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>



<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e7053efb-6f3b-4504-b963-baa7ca244f54"><strong>Standby video input status screen</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6aa5f754-5bcb-41d0-808f-e457670fcd95">Refer to the following “Standby video input status screen” and the TVU MLink standby video status screen settings and descriptions list.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-f268236b-72b5-43ee-bff1-2366de2179ce"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="348" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen.png" alt="Standby video input status screen" class="wp-image-95693" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standby-video-input-status-screen-300x173.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-658e7387-cca0-48ba-92f3-d138b070aece">
<li><strong>Connection status:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-5fbbb05e-32a8-4686-9cc7-62424ff6e797">&#8211; Displays the status and IP of each network connection. The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-03e3c539-d79e-4cbc-98eb-039beee00497">
<li><strong>Transmission status monitor</strong> &#8211; Provides the current transmission status of the Pack. TVU MLink transmits a “Live” picture if the indicator is red. If the indicator is black/gray, TVU MLink is not transmitting live and is on “Standby.”</li>



<li><strong>File upload status monitor</strong> &#8211; Displays the progress of any file being uploaded from the TVU MLink’s SSD hard drive to the TVU Receiver.</li>
</ul>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Uploading a file is not possible when the TVU Pack is in “Live” mode.</p>
</blockquote>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-3cb1933f-5fe4-4279-a187-b722edd34dfd">
<li><strong>Data card status monitor:</strong></li>
</ul>



<p id="block-6162844d-0102-4641-837d-7d9938a0a9a8">&#8211; Displays the current number and status of all data cards connected to the TVU MLink.<br>&#8211; The status of data cards connected to the TVU Pack will appear green, red, or black.<br>&#8211; The <strong>green</strong> status indicates that the data card is connected.<br>&#8211; The <strong>red</strong> status indicates that the data card is attempting to dial.<br>&#8211; The <strong>black</strong> status indicates there is no card detected.</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-6746a05e-f5c0-4f47-9ea3-bf8a098153da">
<li><strong>VoIP/IFB indicator</strong> &#8211; Indicates whether or not the IFB function is on. The small red IFB box indicates that the IFB function is enabled and connected. If the red box does not appear, IFB is not connected or is disabled.</li>



<li><strong>TVU MLink PID and firmware version information</strong> &#8211; Indicates the unit’s identifying PID and version number and is used when contacting TVU customer support.</li>



<li><strong>Audio input level monitor </strong>&#8211; Dynamically displays a graphic indicator in color for the TVU MLink audio input level (DBFS).</li>
</ul>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced Configuration</div>


<h1 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1096bb2e-7122-4498-9515-5500907a2119"><strong>Chapter 2 &#8211; Advanced Configuration</strong></h1>



<p id="block-2a8633c8-f068-486e-b46c-b48bb42af067">This section provides instructions for advanced configuration settings for hotspot, WiFi, modem, microwave, router, and BGAN configuration for the MLink model TE5700 transmitter.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d80faff-c0c4-4f24-8e3f-fa1a77b89c60"><strong>TVU MLink system status monitoring and control using a Web browser, or smart mobile devices</strong></h2>



<p id="block-23344aa8-5a67-4bde-a8e6-123ddc57adef">The TVU Transmitter&#8217;s operational status can be monitored, and various parts of the transmission can be controlled from a Web browser. This interface can be accessed using a standard web browser connected to the TVU MLink TE5700 hotspot USB port on the rear transmitter panel.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5a0616c8-6f56-40e2-ab82-262664494ad8"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="256" height="298" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/MLink-transmitter-status-screen.png" alt="MLink transmitter status screen (Smart mobile device)" class="wp-image-95651" style="aspect-ratio:0.8590604026845637;width:328px;height:auto"/></figure>



<p id="block-6471f519-4712-489e-a5fd-3bd21c3f9cf9">The MLink transmitter status screen allows you to monitor the following operations:</p>



<p id="block-352ab88d-46a6-4eab-805d-cc1b943de4c8"><strong>(1)</strong> <strong>Scroll bar</strong> &#8211; Use the Scroll bar on an iPhone or smart device to select a status screen to monitor and control all aspects of transmission, including data cards, Ethernet, WiFi, BGAN, Receiver, and return video feed.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> If you are using a Display or HDMI display, you will make your selections from a drop-down menu.</p>
</blockquote>



<p id="block-c5db7c4c-272f-4888-a06d-4e09368dde6c"><strong>(2) TVU Pack information</strong> &#8211; Provides information about a specific TVU Pack, including model number, version number, and PID.<br><strong>(3) CPU</strong> &#8211; Displays the current CPU capacity and temperature.<br><strong>(4) Battery</strong> &#8211; Main battery status (Information is not applicable for the TVU MLine product).<br><strong>(5) Input</strong> &#8211; Displays the input source.<br><strong>(6) IFB</strong> &#8211; Allows the user to change the audio level of the IFB function.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-768fedfb-caef-4e63-9e01-de29877b4e6f"><strong>Connecting the MLink TE5500 to the internal hotspot (optional)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-15a0120a-43b6-4ea0-a9b4-df8fd3304421">Complete the following steps to configure the TVU MLink transmitter to the internal hotspot using your iPhone or smart mobile device:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-d3b9bfba-fd18-481d-bad8-35b331cbb873">
<li>Connect the TP-Link WiFi dongle to the rear panel bottom right USB port.</li>



<li>Search for the Hotspot on your iPhone/smart device. Then, when prompted, enter the case-sensitive SSID:
<ul class="wp-block-list">
<li>TVUPACK_XXXX<br>(Where X is the last 4 digits of the MLink’s PID)</li>



<li>The default password is the last 8 digits of the MLink PID</li>



<li>All password characters are uppercase. The password can be changed in the Web UI if desired.</li>
</ul>
</li>
</ol>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="3" id="block-386349a3-2223-4408-b12c-281b874a5074">
<li>Connect to the SSID using your iPhone/smart device. Refer to the following “TVU MLink status; video and network screen” for examples of how the status screens display on a smart device Web browser.</li>



<li>Once the connection is established, open a web browser and enter the following IP address in the address line to see the TVU Pack status: <strong>http://192.168.3.1</strong></li>



<li>Click <strong>Status</strong> in the drop-down menu in the Web user interface to view the system information.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-3570b8a9-03d5-400f-9f51-d68de48273ae"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="184" height="349" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-status-video-and-network-screen.png" alt="TVU MLink status; video and network screen" class="wp-image-95455" style="aspect-ratio:0.5272206303724928;width:294px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-status-video-and-network-screen.png 184w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-status-video-and-network-screen-158x300.png 158w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 184px) 100vw, 184px" /></figure>



<p id="block-626f8a6f-d636-4579-8b12-75bcb64cefd8">The MLink transmitter status screen allows you to monitor the following video and network operations:</p>



<p id="block-7c20f141-7d61-48af-84f4-5a368788fbbe"><strong>(1) Video</strong> &#8211; Displays video transmission information and status.<br><strong>(2) Network</strong> &#8211; Modem card information, including type, connectivity, and IP address, all organized by slot number.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-512479d2-67d0-4b1b-85a1-86e6e57510fe"><strong>Ethernet configuration and settings</strong></h2>



<p id="block-d50c9cbc-e080-4698-8dfc-45e405a8d802">Complete the following steps to set up and configure Ethernet using the MLink setup and configuration screen:</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4b832e95-5564-4edc-9a11-821c45c5f9e2"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="1024" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen-576x1024.png" alt="TVU MLink Ethernet setup and configuration screen" class="wp-image-95700" style="aspect-ratio:0.5625;width:336px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen-576x1024.png 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen-169x300.png 169w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen-768x1366.png 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen-864x1536.png 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Ethernet-setup-and-configuration-screen.png 1050w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-a0440f69-d6cc-449a-b89a-8bce37b8b025">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Ethernet</strong>. Then click the Interface drop-down menu and select <strong>eth0</strong>.</li>



<li>Click the<strong> IP Method</strong> drop-down menu and select a <strong>Static </strong>or DHCP IP method.</li>



<li>If your IP method is static, you can enter a static IP address in the IP Address field.</li>



<li>If your IP method is static, enter the <strong>Subnet Mask</strong> in the Mask field.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note: </strong>The DHCP IP address is automatically generated and cannot be manually entered.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="5" id="block-e722bba5-66e0-41ed-87cb-d46b04df1db4">
<li>If your IP method is static, you must enter the <strong>Gateway</strong> in the Gateway field.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>IMPORTANT:</strong> Be advised that when “Static” is selected from the “IP Method” drop down menu, you must click the Keep Static check box to keep the desired static IP address from being lost after a reboot.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="6" id="block-df485821-c7b9-4509-8115-50e4b64821cc">
<li>Press the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-4d9ca97d-3b70-4192-8739-6672452ad9cf"><strong>WiFi configuration and settings</strong></h2>



<p id="block-26491b78-756f-419e-a1a2-8ff1b2487595">The WiFi menu provides configuration information and access to change the WiFi settings. The MLink TE5500 can optionally support multiple WiFi connections by purchasing optional hardware. For more information, contact TVU Networks support.</p>



<p id="block-b46f3c64-e6a1-482a-b0ce-d091ff2172ca">When multiple WiFi adapters are connected, you can scan available slots for WiFi adapters and configure the WiFi login information using the TVU MLink WiFi setup and configuration window.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized is-style-default" id="block-06731b91-e20e-4c02-8bbd-2a7a2c6789da"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="1024" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window-576x1024.png" alt="TVU MLink WiFi setup and configuration window" class="wp-image-95469" style="aspect-ratio:0.5625;width:352px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window-576x1024.png 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window-169x300.png 169w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window-768x1366.png 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window-864x1536.png 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-WiFi-setup-and-configuration-window.png 1050w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-e85e15ca-0d7e-48cc-a320-686746893ace"><strong>Configuring WiFi</strong></h2>



<p id="block-371cf2e1-754d-438f-8d29-4f183c0b3c49">Complete the steps in the following procedure to configure your WiFi settings:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-ff25734d-9b3c-422a-ac38-3d56e20d3085">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>WiFi</strong>.</li>



<li>Press the <strong>Scan</strong> button to display any available networks. Available networks display in the center panel. Choose the desired network from the center panel.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Security Type</strong> drop-down menu to review the connection&#8217;s security type. This setting supports WPA-DSK and WEP.</li>



<li>In the SSID field, verify your wireless network name.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Connect</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b91e7249-49ce-4a6b-ba9d-38072ef7284b"><strong>Hotspot settings</strong></h2>



<p id="block-97c0a1a4-bef7-4323-9c82-eec08c82583c">The WiFi Hotspot menu provides status information on clients connected by the hotspot.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-9c2bb722-0d67-4df9-ae3c-de1d03002ea4"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="212" height="306" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-hotspot-setup-and-configuration-window.png" alt="TVU MLink hotspot setup and configuration window" class="wp-image-95714" style="aspect-ratio:0.6928104575163399;width:353px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-hotspot-setup-and-configuration-window.png 212w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-hotspot-setup-and-configuration-window-208x300.png 208w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 212px) 100vw, 212px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-57a85665-5297-4bce-8f84-b4f29c55ea2d"><strong>Configuring hotspot</strong></h2>



<p id="block-a99522ae-3ba7-4189-9969-2246b0021d19">Complete the following steps in the following procedure to view and change hotspot status:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-cebd1d83-a91e-406e-9811-738d43e0d85b">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Hotspot</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-c8d91a71-4293-4f20-8cf3-1f49b3d17faa">The Connected Client list window displays a list of devices that are connected by way of hotspots.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-7b322d9b-92cf-4009-b4ec-702255ff5d60">
<li>To update the password, edit the <strong>password field</strong> provided.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-c8f65e56-94b6-411d-b045-70c5be7dfa7f">The new password must be 8 characters and does not take effect until the system restarts.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="3" id="block-4e048320-729d-4a27-a578-99dd56eaf4a4">
<li>The hotspot feature will enable a connected device to access the internet using one of the connected networks.</li>



<li>To manually select the route taken (for example, a Hotel WiFi network), choose the path from the <strong>Route</strong> drop-down menu. In the <strong>Band</strong> drop-down menu, choose <strong>2.4 GHz</strong> or <strong>5 GHz</strong>.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-888dda8c-5c46-4f25-bf37-7f4adde2cedc"><strong>Modem configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-503a352d-2bbf-460c-ab06-528a18e7ce00">The Modem screen provides modem configuration information. Many cellular data cards are automatically detected by the TVU transmitter and will self-configure. If this is the case, no further action will be required. However, if a data card requires configuration, you can use the Modem menu to configure it.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-large is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4fe75a20-4b53-43d3-a51b-366c02ccabf4"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="576" height="1024" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-576x1024.png" alt="TVU MLink Modem setup and configuration panel" class="wp-image-95441" style="aspect-ratio:0.5625;width:358px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-576x1024.png 576w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-169x300.png 169w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-768x1365.png 768w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-864x1536.png 864w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel-1152x2048.png 1152w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Modem-setup-and-configuration-panel.png 1242w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 576px) 100vw, 576px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> For information about antenna configuration for RPS Link and MLink v7 Model TE5700, refer to “Antenna configuration.”</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1673f21b-7c5c-4307-bcae-c9927bfed400"><strong>Configuring data cards</strong></h2>



<p id="block-183cd74f-e36b-4b00-b51e-ce156b882be1">Complete the steps in the following procedure to configure specific data cards:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-65e321a6-8202-4e72-8512-6bb94b2d0025">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select<strong> Modems</strong>.</li>



<li>Click the<strong> Scan</strong> button to search for available modems.</li>



<li>Click the<strong> Available Slots</strong> drop-down list to display a list of available slots for configuration.</li>



<li>Go to the <strong>User Name</strong> field to get the carrier user name information from the network carrier.</li>



<li>Go to the <strong>Password</strong> field to get the carrier password information from the network carrier.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Encryption</strong> drop-down menu and select the appropriate encryption standard.</li>



<li>Go to the <strong>Dial number</strong> field to get the carrier dial information from the network carrier.</li>



<li>Go to the <strong>APN </strong>field to get APN information from the network carrier.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Carrier</strong> drop-down menu to select the desired carrier when roaming.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Scan Carrier</strong> button to scan for available carrier networks.</li>



<li>Click <strong>Apply</strong> to save any changes.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-9961f91e-5594-45da-8bc2-0e2d03e6b99c"><strong>Router configuration settings</strong></h2>



<p id="block-fbe9d043-52fa-47dc-a069-8d687cb947fb">The TVU router has two pass-through data modes, Standard and TVU Router mode. In standard mode, the MLink TE5700 can be used as an internet hotspot using one of the data connections.</p>



<p id="block-22bef902-3f2f-455e-ba87-bf1e9250b7c8">In advanced TVU Router mode, the MLink TE5700 can utilize and make available the full aggregate bandwidth of the system for pass-through traffic. As a result, the bandwidth can often exceed 200 Mbps.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> TVU Router is an advanced licensed feature that must be activated by TVU Support before it can be used.</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-d3f924f1-9623-479a-bc9b-6a54ca979000"><strong>Standard mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-2c20579a-2525-4ce5-b8ec-c99dfe406eba">Standard mode is used for hotspot pass-through, providing a single default connection. Complete the following steps to configure the pass-through in Standard mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-2a741f52-8c6c-41ef-83ba-b262ca07019a">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Router</strong>.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Standard</strong> radio button.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Apply</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-57d91090-3358-4b44-830f-67165cbd8c96"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="215" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standard-mode-selection.png" alt="Standard mode selection" class="wp-image-95686" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standard-mode-selection.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Standard-mode-selection-300x107.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-393a0dd7-5bb4-407d-beb4-8070a0847bd9"><strong>TVU Router mode configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-68daebbd-efa4-4a4f-a2e5-795b69505c56">Complete the following steps to configure TVU Router mode:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-2454ef71-97b4-474c-8a11-ac1240c84a07">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Router</strong>.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>TVU Router</strong> radio button.</li>



<li>Click to open the <strong>Router</strong> drop-down menu and select your region.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Ethernet Host checkbox</strong> to enable services for up to 10 attached devices.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Apply</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Refer to the TVU Router User Guide for more information.</p>
</blockquote>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-ffddacbd-e9fa-4006-90e3-31a49318aa94"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="225" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/MLink-Router-mode-selection.png" alt="Router mode selection" class="wp-image-95630" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/MLink-Router-mode-selection.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/MLink-Router-mode-selection-300x112.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-dcd2f5f1-975a-4c7f-94ea-d98a373b9189"><strong>Advanced encoder configuration</strong></h2>



<p id="block-b98e6d65-dd94-4411-a1a0-568e2150298b">Complete the following steps to use the encoder function to choose the video encoding type for the transmitter:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-00c2b508-ef16-4edc-9af1-ab12c19f1ec4">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Encoder Type</strong>. Selections and their criteria are as follows:</li>
</ol>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-9e684341-fb7e-42a4-8b56-6b7e1b16b362">
<li>The encoder type default is <strong>H.264</strong>.</li>



<li>If the optional HEVC license is purchased, both H.265 Interview and H.265 Fast Motion mode will be available as selections.</li>



<li>Select the <strong>H.265 Interview </strong>radio button for shots containing limited motion, such as stand-ups or fixed-shot interviews.</li>



<li>Use the H.265 Fast Motion radio button to optimize compression for videos with significant motion elements, such as sports videos with high motion or fast pans and zooms.</li>
</ul>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-6cfa564c-8c81-4c27-abef-adb6f8cfacfe"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="265" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Encoder-type-status-screen.png" alt="Encoder Type status panel" class="wp-image-95574" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Encoder-type-status-screen.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Encoder-type-status-screen-300x132.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-bf241fb1-39de-478b-a47b-ac7640b9e498">
<li>Click the <strong>radio button</strong> to select the encoder type that suits your application based on the above criteria. Then, click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your selection.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-37998ba0-27ed-4e2f-8ca2-679aff17416c"><strong>IP Source</strong> &#8211;<strong> Selecting a camera or outside IP source</strong></h2>



<p id="block-7f6d77e5-5fe4-4b5d-9d52-88bb90a67af6">Complete the steps in the following procedure to select an outside IP source or camera source from the selection window with which to go live:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-b6009da1-61be-42be-a615-26bf56b5938f">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select<strong> IP Source</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-dbadbd78-3653-42cc-99cf-2632af9d545f"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="219" height="144" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-IP-Source-window.png" alt="" class="wp-image-95728" style="aspect-ratio:1.5208333333333333;width:339px;height:auto"/></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-4b6fc7dd-40b2-4176-9f35-0db5f944e6e0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="164" height="262" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-IP-Source-selections.png" alt="TVU MLink IP Source selections" class="wp-image-95721" style="aspect-ratio:0.6259541984732825;width:341px;height:auto"/></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-418af9da-d194-482d-8dc7-52541b27578e">
<li>Click the <strong>SDI</strong> radio button to display the camera source<strong> </strong>connected to the TVUPack.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>IPSource </strong>radio button to add an IP source with which to go live.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Home</strong> button to send all IP sources in one matrix picture to the TVU MLink receiver.</li>



<li>Enter the valid<strong> IP address</strong> in the field under an available source selection with which you want to go live. Then, click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your source selection.</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Antenna configuration: RPS Link and MLink v7 model TE5700</div>


<h1 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-a757ccae-5fe2-44b0-9a74-be7a29827bf2"><strong>Chapter 3 &#8211; Antenna configuration RPS Link and</strong> <strong>MLink v7 model TE5700</strong></h1>



<p id="block-451c2118-121b-4536-af02-e4af7bd4e731">This section provides antenna configuration procedures for the RPS Link, MLink v7, and Rack Router v2 (Models RE975/980/990)</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-8ba8f2bf-1593-4c51-9498-de360d8b8bae"><strong>RPS Link and MLink v7</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6895b12c-1cfa-4507-88a8-33423e352b47">To configure antennas for the RPS Link and MLink model TE5700 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-412c07f8-ff8f-4613-839d-946bdeea9266">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8fc8ad01-4355-4b1e-bf9d-835d8bf09c8f"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png" alt="ANT 0 antenna configuration" class="wp-image-95518" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/ANT-0-antenna-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-9e34766f-f56b-4130-af90-26882a437815">
<li>For RPS Link and MlinkV7 (TE5700) unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-fafca7b4-dfd9-4f78-9d35-f10814825bf0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="2x 5G modem and 4x 4G LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95504" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<p id="block-47854015-af18-41d8-be7c-e840e363f0d4">Notes:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-64c625bd-3c38-4791-9de8-5bd5c1a3bdbb">
<li>The 5G antenna is compatible with 5G modems and 4G/LTE modems, whereas the 4G/LTE antenna can only be used with 4G/LTE modems but not 5G modems.</li>



<li>In addition, by connecting a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 0 port for a 4G/LTE modem, the user has the option to connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to the ANT 1 port for a 4G/LTE modem. Meaning both ANT 0 and ANT 1 ports can be used for the antenna connection. However, connecting the ANT 1 port on both RPS Link and MlinkV7 (TE5700) product lineup is optional and not mandatory.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-67b2fe08-bb4a-461f-aed8-b189d38342b6"><strong>Rack Router v2 (RE975/980/990)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-cf44781d-b314-4338-a3ab-e2e7c1748520">To configure the Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE975 unit, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-0823d8b8-f10a-4866-8ed7-0883b423f14e">
<li>Connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, and ANT 1 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-8d208f97-fee2-43a6-be63-21feb4cf8175"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95665" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-router-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-cf224ac7-acc3-459d-9582-ecd5ee13a2ef">
<li>To configure a Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration, also known as RE980 unit, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on slot 1 and slot 2 for 2x 5G modems, and connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1 on slot 3, slot 4, slot 5, slot 6 for 4x 4G/LTE modems.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-64267436-18e0-4273-bed1-0cd8d113be34"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95672" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-2x-5G-modem-and-4x-4G-LTE-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="3" id="block-7c1ba589-63f7-44e1-9cda-414f1a9978f1">
<li>For a Rack Router V2 unit with 6x 5G modem configuration, also known as RE990, connect a 4G/5G external antenna SMA connector to ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2, ANT 3 on all 6 slots.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-5e15dc31-fcfe-43b7-8b9e-c98065f4b5f0"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="624" height="334" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png" alt="Rack Router V2 unit with 2x 5G modem and 4x 4G/LTE modem configuration" class="wp-image-95679" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration.png 624w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Rack-Router-V2-unit-with-6x-5G-modem-configuration-300x161.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 624px) 100vw, 624px" /></figure>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	Advanced transmitter operations</div>


<h1 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-fd44bf6c-b9a4-465f-a972-74d22059c3b7"><strong>Chapter 4 &#8211; Advanced transmitter operations</strong></h1>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-ee3b4217-0ba3-4093-a150-8162c6c2fb0a"><strong>Receiver status and control</strong></h2>



<p id="block-bd3db4c4-7063-4b5a-b5db-c58530f42901">Advanced control of the MLink’s Live session can be configured using the Config page available through the MLink Hotspot feature.</p>



<p id="block-2cfb0910-59c8-48d5-a098-899c3d0a0d36">Use the Config panel to control bitrate and delay by entering your data in the respective fields and clicking the Apply button to save your settings. This status window also allows you to choose the operational mode from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the screen to display Interview, Normal, Fast Moving, SD, Tape Feed, and User Definable selections.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-b9f40106-8e7b-4075-aea5-cc08ca86e2cc"><strong>Controlling the live transmission</strong></h2>



<p id="block-5c908f15-58e8-4bc6-ad62-ef16399d01d5">Complete the following steps to select an alternate receiver, view its status, and set up and control a ”Live” transmission.</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-5f80d0c9-2bc3-4ce4-99f8-38a213963ed7">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Configuration</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-5bd796aa-3d8e-45ab-8dc2-28d305f4ada2"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="185" height="260" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-receiver-Config-panel.png" alt="TVU MLink receiver Config panel" class="wp-image-95448" style="aspect-ratio:0.7115384615384616;width:315px;height:auto"/></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-33f6af95-0b75-4302-87b6-757e7a1da8ff">
<li>The <strong>R: </strong>drop-down menu displays the receiver&#8217;s name. To view and select a different receiver, click the <strong>R:</strong> drop-down menu to scroll and select a receiver from the list.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Solo</strong> checkbox if you want a particular TVU Pack to only display ‘Online” on the receiver you selected from the R: drop-down menu.</li>



<li>Enter the desired transmission <strong>bitrate</strong> and <strong>delay</strong> in the bitrate (kbps) field.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Apply</strong> button to save your changes.</li>



<li>To Start or Stop the live transmission, click the <strong>Live</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Below the Live and Apply buttons, you can view the receiver status. Receiver status displays the current TVU Pack Receiver ID, TVU Pack Transmitter ID, Line Quality, Error Rate, and Auto Set information.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="7" id="block-0b958974-d3dd-4e5c-a688-4f8a59adbdfc">
<li>Click the <strong>Mode:</strong> drop-down menu to select an alternate mode for optimized preset bitrate and latency based on your broadcast setting(s).</li>
</ol>


<div class="tvu-special-sidebar-menu">	File-based workflows</div>


<h1 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-c271b41e-1c85-445b-b28f-98ddf4193224"><strong>Chapter 5 &#8211; File-based workflows</strong></h1>



<p id="block-51a33944-09e5-4cfc-a648-4d2c5f8acc2c">This section provides information and instructions for file-based workflows. Topics in this section include dual-encoder operations, Autosync, using the recording function, file upload feature, and download feature.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-636257fd-1b2b-479f-9c13-fe06f010b161"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="225" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/File-based-workflows.png" alt="File-based workflows" class="wp-image-95595" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/File-based-workflows.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/File-based-workflows-300x112.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-41be3b54-b214-4a31-9e12-8993463ad81e"><strong>Dual-encoder feature</strong></h2>



<p id="block-c52be48e-b41b-4539-ac5c-edaa06994fc8">The optional TVU dual-encoder feature records a pristine, high-resolution copy of all detected video directly to the local SSD storage. SSD storage ensures that no video is lost, even if the original transmission encountered difficulties.</p>



<p id="block-31f8cee3-25ef-41d0-8af4-df9e86038827">The TVU One transmitter continuously records at a high bitrate using a second encoder. The second encoder is always on when the unit is powered and does not require any manual configuration or power.</p>



<p id="block-8bbbf6bd-576b-44d5-ad9f-e45ad0b594e8">An operator can then view and extract recorded content from the TVU transmitter remotely using the receiver download feature. In addition, the local TVU operator can access the recorded content for editing purposes.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-57bda6c0-c980-4e9c-9e8b-1d07a5ccfab5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="524" height="302" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Dual-encoder-diagram.png" alt="Dual encoder diagram" class="wp-image-95560" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Dual-encoder-diagram.png 524w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Dual-encoder-diagram-300x173.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 524px) 100vw, 524px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-7d72753f-3aeb-40bd-8389-81aa29e76704"><strong>Autosync feature</strong></h2>



<p id="block-240a43ac-77ad-48a8-bc6c-8399d6a808c9">Autosync is a high-speed file transfer feature that automatically pushes the files from the transmitter to the receiver using IS+.</p>



<p id="block-daf726a3-b6eb-4217-8f41-85b8eac5af12">There are two Autosync methods you can use to send files to the TVU receiver automatically:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-9b53fbc4-ad9c-48b1-84f4-8b6a56ccdc57">
<li>You can perform Autosync by inserting a USB stick into the transmitter USB connector.</li>



<li>You can use the TVU transmitter wireless hotspot feature to transfer files directly to the TVU transmitter for upload.</li>
</ul>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-5b44d390-99ff-4c9b-bb5b-7fba82df2c28"><strong>Using the Autosync feature with a hotspot (PC)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-ee73b5b4-9faa-4159-8aba-bf0f0e9906c7">Complete the following steps to perform an Autosync file transfer using a wireless hotspot:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-efb00a54-b543-4158-b15a-01ceefff2e15">
<li>Search for the hotspot on your laptop or smartphone. The SSID is:</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-0196e044-5f9b-460f-bed6-aac06d35b437">TVUPACK_XXXX<br>(Where X is the last 4 digits of the TVU transmitter PID)</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-8640ed28-8eb2-4611-8b8a-7fbbc66c7aa2">
<li>Connect to the SSID.</li>



<li>The password is the last 8 digits of the PID of the backpack (Note: All characters are uppercase).</li>



<li>Once the connection is established, obtain the IP address in the Connection details.</li>



<li>Open file explorer, select “Network,” and enter the IP address. For example: //192.168.3.1</li>



<li>The Autosync folder displays as shown below in “Network IP connection and Autosync folder.” Drag-and-drop the files to be transferred into the Autosync folder.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-254b5c72-58e4-4fd4-a238-c1fda22595d5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="410" height="404" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Network-IP-connection-and-Autosync-folder.png" alt="Network IP connection and Autosync folder" class="wp-image-95658" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Network-IP-connection-and-Autosync-folder.png 410w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Network-IP-connection-and-Autosync-folder-300x296.png 300w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Network-IP-connection-and-Autosync-folder-50x50.png 50w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 410px) 100vw, 410px" /></figure>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-32c37fb7-ae93-4abe-b5c3-6315c66379fd"><strong>Using the Autosync feature with a hotspot (Mac)</strong></h2>



<p id="block-e0e3161c-89eb-4c35-bb9e-b6d428f4682f">Complete the following steps to perform an Autosync file transfer using a wireless hotspot:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-5a2f47b5-e765-4535-aab6-37edb70f355e">
<li>Search for the hotspot on your laptop or smartphone. The SSID is:</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-7b6f1243-5ed1-4d73-b02e-1a3536172ceb">TVUPACK_XXXX<br>(Where X is the last four digits of the TVU transmitter PID)</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-cb7b6017-2842-4cfe-a2f8-bb576cb81f39">
<li>Connect to the SSID.</li>



<li>The password is the last eight digits of the PID of the backpack (Note: All characters are uppercase)</li>



<li>Go to <strong>Finder</strong> and click the <strong>Go</strong> tab. Then, select <strong>Connect to Server</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-e8d40e53-70dc-4270-966c-156f5f310554"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="352" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Connect-to-the-server.png" alt="Connect to the server" class="wp-image-95532" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Connect-to-the-server.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Connect-to-the-server-300x175.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="5" id="block-36c99723-fd01-4d2b-a357-a1190229c916">
<li>Enter “<strong>192.168.3.1</strong>” in the “Server Address” field and click the <strong>Connect</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-814effb9-8571-41fb-9d11-e0018baf8fdb"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="328" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Enter-the-server-address.png" alt="Enter the server address" class="wp-image-95588" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Enter-the-server-address.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Enter-the-server-address-300x163.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="6" id="block-e847a4f2-e88b-4e3b-92a7-e436290d5a3f">
<li>A “Connect As” pop-up menu displays. Click the<strong> Guest</strong> radio button and then the <strong>Connect</strong> button.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full" id="block-e287e442-1ba4-42df-949b-dfd8c2a978ca"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="602" height="287" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Autosync-shared-drive-icon.png" alt="Autosync shared drive icon" class="wp-image-95525" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Autosync-shared-drive-icon.png 602w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/Autosync-shared-drive-icon-300x143.png 300w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 602px) 100vw, 602px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="7" id="block-bdae600f-e587-422a-baaa-feee854de03a">
<li>Move files you want to send using TVU Autosync to your desktop&#8217;s “Autosync” shared drive icon.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-1bbb6bd3-bf4b-41f2-9920-18743ff308bd"><strong>Using the Autosync feature with a USB stick</strong></h2>



<p id="block-254862f8-9ecf-4ead-8af4-e630acb60c25">The Autosync feature allows you to transmit wireless digital content from the TVU transmitter to the TVU receiver using a USB memory stick.</p>



<p id="block-6443aa0a-cf74-4aa2-8f18-a11436868831">The TVU transmitter will auto-detect the memory stick and automatically transfer the contents to its internal SSD hard drive. The content will then be available for wireless transmission to the TVU receiver.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Attention:</strong> The supported disk format is FAT 32 only.</p>
</blockquote>



<p id="block-00a6f83d-45f8-4b62-880e-b0f9df484bd9">To perform an Autosync using a USB memory stick to a TVU One transmitter, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-9bbe37b0-c3d9-43ec-857f-026a35f9cb33">
<li>Create a directory named “autosyncimport” in the memory stick.</li>



<li>Copy the content you want transferred into the “autosyncimport” directory.</li>



<li>Plug the memory stick into any spare USB port on the transmitter.</li>



<li>Monitor the file upload status on the TVU transmitter’s LCD screen. Do not unplug the USB memory stick during the file upload, as this may cause the system to malfunction.</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-3eec195d-dd82-4886-956d-0c7b5ebe721f"><strong>Accessing stored content</strong></h2>



<p id="block-75fbfd0a-80f1-46e0-8475-4a8ae69626be">You can download the recorded content locally to a USB Memory Stick.</p>



<p id="block-bf48c713-4a68-46bf-963e-17436ec0a367">Connecting a USB memory stick (FAT 32 only) to a TVU transmitter while the video source is disconnected, the entire video content of the last session is transferred to the memory stick in an NLE-compatible format.</p>



<p id="block-d8a0a6ff-3a4e-4df2-a36e-e8215190abc5">Additionally, the Recording screen will list the recorded sessions on the TVU transmitter SSD available for download on the web-based monitoring and controls interface. The following three functions are available on the Recording screen:</p>



<ul class="wp-block-list" id="block-df438039-fc2d-4548-97fa-4dc8b203751d">
<li>Copy and Play</li>



<li>Upload</li>



<li>Mark in and Mark out</li>
</ul>



<p id="block-a73dadd0-5568-49bf-82b5-a3886a3d9e18">Refer to “Working with recorded content” for instructions about using the Mark in and Mark out functions.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-7616bcf9-ffdd-466a-b581-d01b51b0395b"><strong>Copy and Play functions</strong></h2>



<p id="block-7c7d873b-2ce7-48ed-a879-97f80f875757">The Copy function allows the user to extract recorded clips listed in the recording screen from the transmitter to a local USB drive. To use the Copy function, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-b6916b8d-b367-4fce-a316-fd02449f1953">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Recording</strong>.</li>



<li>Select the checkbox next to the desired recording(s).</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Copy</strong> button. A warning message displays if there is not enough space on the memory stick to complete the copy function.</li>



<li>Select a clip and click the <strong>Play</strong> button to preview any recorded content.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-558ee41f-8afa-4568-8ce6-68c5254a59b5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="173" height="312" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-screen.png" alt="TVU Pack recording screen" class="wp-image-95476" style="aspect-ratio:0.5544871794871795;width:291px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-screen.png 173w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-screen-166x300.png 166w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 173px) 100vw, 173px" /></figure>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> Playback is only available on iOS devices.</p>
</blockquote>



<p id="block-793e5df2-2188-4ba9-b8c9-81549fe851db">Once a file has been selected to download to the USB, a “Copying” message will appear when the process has begun, and a “Complete” message will display when the process is complete.</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The TVU transmitter cannot be “live” to use this function.</p>
</blockquote>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-9ed48a2c-6c5a-4438-a12d-453e13401e5c"><strong>Upload function</strong></h2>



<p id="block-3a903d66-0e50-4128-b5b2-332bbc9ec09e">The Upload function in the Recording screen will use the Autosync feature to push recorded clips from the transmitter to a remote receiver.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-2d34d2ce-ea26-47ce-9933-2938c9bf4f7f"><strong>Working with recorded content</strong></h2>



<p id="block-3eee1b0a-1cda-48d1-a013-b86c700361a9">The Recording panel features three functions that allow you to work with recorded content.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-92511564-04d3-443a-8bbc-c336413a9297"><strong>Mark in and Mark Out functions</strong></h2>



<p id="block-040c7a0b-227b-4414-b98c-e587a255f81a">The Recording panel&#8217;s Mark in and Mark Out functions allow users to explicitly select a portion of a live ingest for extract or upload functions. For example, this function allows users to isolate and copy a live video clip to a USB thumb drive or upload it directly to a receiver using the Recording status panel.</p>



<p id="block-a534b21d-bcb9-4c49-b864-f9bb947a2fab">To use the Mark in and Mark Out functions, complete the following steps:</p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> The TVU device is always recording when it is powered on and a valid video source is connected.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-ed238718-3ee4-471a-9d99-1535b11a7025">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Recording</strong>.</li>
</ol>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-14dbf21e-ef44-48b4-89a1-c136e41883b6"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="173" height="312" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-status-panel.png" alt="TVU Pack recording status panel" class="wp-image-95483" style="aspect-ratio:0.5544871794871795;width:285px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-status-panel.png 173w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-Pack-recording-status-panel-166x300.png 166w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 173px) 100vw, 173px" /></figure>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="2" id="block-18d96b12-0025-4c97-8eec-c39a2d672fdf">
<li>Click the <strong>Mark in</strong> button to mark the IN point of a segment in the recorded video in the TVU Pack Recording panel.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Mark Out</strong> button to mark the OUT point of a segment in the recorded video on the TVU Pack.</li>
</ol>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p><strong>Note:</strong> After the IN and OUT points are identified, it is possible to play the clip, copy it locally to an inserted USB thumb drive, or upload it directly to the selected receiver.</p>
</blockquote>



<ol class="wp-block-list" start="4" id="block-754bbd5b-61af-4e16-86c1-b41270510661">
<li>In the Name field, enter a specific name for the recorded segment.</li>



<li>Click the<strong> Apply</strong> button to add the recording to the recorded segment list at the bottom of the Recording status window.</li>



<li>To search for and display a recorded video segment by date, click the <strong>calendar</strong> icon in the Query search field, select the <strong>recording date</strong>, and click the <strong>Query</strong> button to display the recording in the list. Click the<strong> Select All</strong> checkbox to display only recordings completed on a selected date.</li>



<li>To select and play a preview of a specific video recording in the list, click the <strong>checkbox</strong> next to the recording and click the<strong> Play</strong> button.</li>



<li>To copy a clip from the list to a TVU Pack, insert the thumb drive into the TVU Pack USB port, click the <strong>recorded file</strong> checkbox in the list, and click the <strong>Copy</strong> button.</li>



<li>Click the <strong>Upload</strong> button to transfer the copied recorded file from the TVU Pack to the default receiver (designated in the receiver window).</li>
</ol>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-51c34dae-fe87-45c2-811b-ba474571791a"><strong>Upload feature</strong></h2>



<p id="block-6c9d25f1-fd70-45f5-85aa-21cdc4d90b49">The TVU MLink Upload window allows users to upload files using the Autosync feature to a specific receiver.</p>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-90ee3744-284e-4d8e-b41d-2799982e0ead"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="207" height="283" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/03/TVU-MLink-Upload-window.png" alt="TVU MLink Upload window" class="wp-image-95462" style="aspect-ratio:0.7314487632508834;width:325px;height:auto"/></figure>



<p id="block-d336eccc-581d-48ef-8c79-2d0675c22f1b">To select a specific receiver to upload files from, complete the following steps:</p>



<ol class="wp-block-list" id="block-97913f80-4677-44f0-b11b-4b7dc158a2a4">
<li>Click the drop-down menu and select <strong>Upload</strong>.</li>



<li>Select the specific receiver from the drop-down menu for each file you want to upload.</li>



<li>After selecting a receiver, click the <strong>Select Default R:</strong> checkbox to make your selection the default receiver. This will enable all future files to be uploaded to the default receiver.</li>



<li>Click<strong> Apply</strong> to save your changes.</li>
</ol>



<p id="block-e8899af6-30d4-49ba-97fe-ee310989f5af">For instructions on uploading files from a TVU Transmitter to the TVU Receiver, see “Using the Autosync feature with a hotspot (PC)” for Automatic Ingest of USB Memory Stick Content to TVU Pack for more information.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-249ee0ef-f4aa-465f-ad5b-70f211cdb095"><strong>Download feature</strong></h2>



<p id="block-45e41c98-18a2-436c-8328-1bb972b9a412">The download (pull) RX feature lets the operator view and extract recorded Pack videos remotely.</p>



<p id="block-38ed9440-c6f6-4057-8cbc-92bcdcdc928a">The download local Pack (T) feature allows local access to recorded content for editing purposes.</p>



<p id="block-10fdae2b-4209-470d-ba55-0d2d3a253774">Refer to the Receiver Operating Manual for detailed information about the Download feature and its functionality.</p>



<h2 class="wp-block-heading" id="block-4004cdc3-5238-4a23-af11-2201e0b7424c"><strong>Product Specifications:</strong></h2>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-472614b5-e4b4-4582-a8ce-2ddc21ba55a5"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="549" height="621" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5500-specs.png" alt="MLink TE5500 product spec" class="wp-image-136216" style="aspect-ratio:0.9121951219512195;width:811px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5500-specs.png 549w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5500-specs-265x300.png 265w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 549px) 100vw, 549px" /></figure>



<figure class="wp-block-image size-full is-resized is-style-default" id="block-e85ddcaf-4495-491b-88f7-4a512f6759aa"><img loading="lazy" decoding="async" width="550" height="677" src="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5700-specs.png" alt="MLink TE5700 product spec" class="wp-image-136224" style="aspect-ratio:0.8037518037518038;width:817px;height:auto" srcset="https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5700-specs.png 550w, https://www.tvunetworks.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/05/MLink-Model-TE5700-specs-244x300.png 244w" sizes="auto, (max-width: 550px) 100vw, 550px" /></figure>



<p></p>



<blockquote class="wp-block-quote is-layout-flow wp-block-quote-is-layout-flow">
<p>© Copyright 2024 TVU Networks Corporation. All rights reserved in all media.<br>Document Part Number: TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide Rev D EN 03-2024</p>
</blockquote>
<p>The post <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com/tip/tvu-mlink-te5500-and-te5700-user-guide/">TVU MLink TE5500 and TE5700 User Guide</a> appeared first on <a href="https://www.tvunetworks.com">TVU Networks</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
					
		
		
			</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
